You are on page 1of 276

Fire Safety

FireFinder
Network Command Center Graphics
(NCC-G/-GL and NCCWAN Version 7.01)
Operation, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd.


8 Fernwood Road 2185 Derry Road West
Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Mississauga, Ontario L5N 7A6

P/N 315-049679-7
Table Of Contents
1 General Description and Features ......................................................... 1-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
NCCG Version 7 Enhancements ............................................................................................. 1-2
NCCG System Capabilities ..................................................................................................... 1-2
About This Manual ......................................................................................................... 1-3
Description ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Features ......................................................................................................................... 1-4
NCCWAN Enhancements .............................................................................................. 1-6
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Product Perspective ....................................................................................................... 1-6
User Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1-7

2 Installation ............................................................................................... 2-1


System Requirements - Software.................................................................................. 2-1
System Requirements - Hardware ................................................................................ 2-1
Pointing Devices ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Printing Devices ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
Hard Disk Capacity .................................................................................................................. 2-3
Hardware Connections .................................................................................................. 2-3
NCC-2F ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card .......................................................... 2-3
NCC-2F CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ 2-3
NCC-2F Installation .................................................................................................................. 2-4
NCC-2F Electrical Connections .............................................................................................. 2-5
Network (XNET/MNET) ............................................................................................................ 2-5
Shields ...................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Earth Ground ............................................................................................................................ 2-5
Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL) .......................................................... 2-6
NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 ...................................... 2-7
NCC-1F ........................................................................................................................... 2-7
XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card .......................................................... 2-7
NCC-1F CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ 2-7
NCC-1F INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 2-8
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................... 2-9
Network (XNET/MNET) ............................................................................................................ 2-9
Shields ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Earth Ground ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL) ........................................................ 2-10
NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 .................................... 2-11
COM-1 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................2-12

i
Table of Contents (Continued)

COM-1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS .........................................................................2-14


Network (HNET) with NCC-2F .............................................................................................. 2-14
Network (HNET) with NCC-1F .............................................................................................. 2-14
Computer Connection with NCC-2F ..................................................................................... 2-16
Computer Connection with NCC-1F ..................................................................................... 2-16
Touch Screen Installation ............................................................................................ 2-16
UPS Power Supply (For Application In U.S.A.) .......................................................... 2-21
Security Key Attachment ............................................................................................. 2-22
No Security Key Detected ..................................................................................................... 2-22
Degrade Security Startup ...................................................................................................... 2-22
Security Key Feature Value ................................................................................................... 2-23
Software Installation .................................................................................................... 2-24
For Computers Using Windows XP™ ............................................................................2-24
For Computers Using Windows NT™ ............................................................................2-38
If Windows NT™ Has Installed The Explorer Desktop ........................................................ 2-48
Exiting NCCG to the Windows NT™ Desktop for Printer Installation or Other Mainte-
nance Functions ........................................................................................................... 2-51
Printer Installation ........................................................................................................ 2-52
For Computers Using Windows XP™ ............................................................................2-52
To install a printer on a computer that DOES NOT have NCCG preinstalled .................... 2-52
For Computers Using Windows NT™ ............................................................................2-56
To install a printer on a computer that DOES NOT have NCCG preinstalled .................... 2-56
TO INSTALL THE LOGGING PRINTER IN THE NCC ...................................................2-58
Printer Emphasis .................................................................................................................... 2-58
To install a graphics output only printer (optional) ............................................................... 2-60
NCCG Graphic Printer Setup ................................................................................................ 2-60
Template Placement .................................................................................................... 2-61

3 Operator Display ...................................................................................... 3-1


Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
System Status Line .................................................................................................................. 3-2
The Browser Window ............................................................................................................... 3-3
The Graphics Window.............................................................................................................. 3-6
The Event Window ................................................................................................................... 3-6
System Node Status Bar ......................................................................................................... 3-9
The Button Array .................................................................................................................... 3-10
Control Point Window ............................................................................................................ 3-11

4 Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-1


Basic Configuration - System ........................................................................................ 4-1
Off-Line System Configuration ................................................................................................ 4-1
Title Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Options Tab .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
More Tab ................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Display Tab ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
Printers Tab .............................................................................................................................. 4-9
Using the Graphics Printer .................................................................................................... 4-10

ii
Table of Contents (Continued)

Graphics Print Format ............................................................................................................ 4-10


Set Time Tab .......................................................................................................................... 4-12
Logon Tab ............................................................................................................................... 4-13
Basic Configuration - Network ..................................................................................... 4-17
NCC-GL and MXL(IA)/XLS Address Setup ................................................................. 4-20
NCCG Node Edit Window ...................................................................................................... 4-21
MXL/XLS Node Edit Window ................................................................................................. 4-23
WAIO Node Edit Window ....................................................................................................... 4-24
WAN Components Network Map .......................................................................................... 4-27
Adding WAN Components ..................................................................................................... 4-28
Editing WAN Network Map Components .............................................................................. 4-28
Connection of COM-1 WAN Components ................................................................... 4-31
Supervision of COM-1 WAN Components .................................................................. 4-32
WAIO Network Settings ......................................................................................................... 4-35
Basic Configuration - Device Edit ............................................................................... 4-36
INPUT ..................................................................................................................................... 4-37
GRAPHICS ............................................................................................................................. 4-38
To Assign an Icon ................................................................................................................... 4-39
To Assign a Background Graphic .......................................................................................... 4-40
Placing an Icon on a Background Graphic ........................................................................... 4-43
OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 4-44
Control and Event Customization - Macros ................................................................ 4-45
User-Defined Macro Commands ........................................................................................... 4-45
Adding A Macro ...................................................................................................................... 4-46
Modifying a Macro .................................................................................................................. 4-47
Deleting a Macro .................................................................................................................... 4-48
Printing a List of Macros ........................................................................................................ 4-48
Exiting the Macro Manager ................................................................................................... 4-48
Control and Event Customization - Holidays .............................................................. 4-48
Printing a List of Holidays ...................................................................................................... 4-49
Saving Definitions and Exiting the Holiday Manager ........................................................... 4-50
Control and Event Customization - Events ................................................................. 4-50
Adding an Event ..................................................................................................................... 4-51
Daily ........................................................................................................................................ 4-53
Daily Solar .............................................................................................................................. 4-53
One Time Only ....................................................................................................................... 4-54
Modifying an Event ................................................................................................................ 4-54
Deleting an Event ................................................................................................................... 4-55
Printing a List of Events and Definitions .............................................................................. 4-55
Saving Events and Definitions .............................................................................................. 4-55
Graphic Image Maintenance - Images ........................................................................ 4-55
Importing Base Browse and Unprogrammed Event Images ............................................... 4-56
Graphic Display Area Background Color .............................................................................. 4-57
Creating and Editing Images ................................................................................................. 4-58
Adding Images ....................................................................................................................... 4-59
Graphic Image Maintenance - Import ......................................................................... 4-61
Exiting the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base without Saving Selections ............................ 4-64
Rebuilding The Database ...................................................................................................... 4-64

iii
Table of Contents (Continued)

Image and Device Relationship Report ................................................................................ 4-65


Saving Selections and Exiting the Images Window ............................................................. 4-66
Exiting the Images Window without Saving Selections ....................................................... 4-66
Icon Editor .................................................................................................................... 4-66
System Sounds ............................................................................................................ 4-73
System Data Base Backup and Restore - Save ......................................................... 4-75
CD-RW Control ...................................................................................................................... 4-76
Exiting without Saving ........................................................................................................... 4-79
System Data Base Backup and Restore - Load ......................................................... 4-79
Exiting without Loading .......................................................................................................... 4-81
System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/Zeus Import .................................... 4-81
Exiting without Saving ........................................................................................................... 4-82
Changing a Device State ............................................................................................. 4-82

5 Operation ................................................................................................. 5-1


Logging On ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
Logging Off ..................................................................................................................... 5-2
Acknowledging Events and Audibles ............................................................................ 5-2
ACK ........................................................................................................................................... 5-2
SILENCE................................................................................................................................... 5-3
RESET ...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Event Display and Acknowledgement UL864 9th Edition ..................................................... 5-3
Viewing Events in the Graphics Window ...................................................................... 5-4
ZOOM IN ................................................................................................................................... 5-4
ZOOM OUT .............................................................................................................................. 5-4
NEXT......................................................................................................................................... 5-4
PREV ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Displaying Event Information - System ......................................................................... 5-5
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................... 5-5
SUPERVISORY ........................................................................................................................ 5-6
SECURITY ................................................................................................................................ 5-6
TROUBLES .............................................................................................................................. 5-7
STATUS .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
DISABLED ................................................................................................................................ 5-8
ANALOG ................................................................................................................................... 5-8
THRESHOLD ............................................................................................................................ 5-9
SENSITIVITY .......................................................................................................................... 5-10
MODULE TYPES ................................................................................................................... 5-11
DEVICE TYPE ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................ 5-14
NODE STATUS ....................................................................................................................... 5-15
DONE ...................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Displaying Event Information - By Node ..................................................................... 5-15
Local/Global Operation ................................................................................................ 5-18
General Description ............................................................................................................... 5-18
General Limitations ................................................................................................................ 5-19
MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup ..................................................................................... 5-19

iv
Table of Contents (Continued)

MXL/XLS Network Status Bar ..................................................................................... 5-21


Manipulating MXL, XL3 and XLS Groups ................................................................... 5-21
Monitor Mode ............................................................................................................... 5-23
Control Mode ................................................................................................................ 5-23
Full System Control ...................................................................................................... 5-24
Summary Screen Showing Where Control Lies ......................................................... 5-24
WAIO System Node Button ......................................................................................... 5-24
Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control .................................................................... 5-26
Countdown Timer for Automatic Transfer of Control .................................................. 5-27
Loss of Control Handling and Notification .................................................................. 5-27
NCC WAN Database Synchronization ........................................................................ 5-28
Logging Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode ................................................. 5-28
Report and Graphics Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode ........................... 5-28
Event and Command History (Global with Filter by Group) ....................................... 5-28
History Data Conversion to Comma Delimited Text File ............................................ 5-29
Color Pallet ................................................................................................................... 5-29
Fly Over Comment ....................................................................................................... 5-29
Display Node Name ..................................................................................................... 5-30
Macro Command Scripts Used on HUB-4 Connected Panels ................................... 5-31
Command Additions for NCC-WAN ............................................................................. 5-32

6 Manual Operation .................................................................................... 6-1


Entering Core System Commands ................................................................................ 6-1
Core Commands ............................................................................................................ 6-2
ACKnowledge Command ......................................................................................................... 6-2
DEEnergize Command ............................................................................................................ 6-3
DEVice Command .................................................................................................................... 6-3
DISable Command ................................................................................................................... 6-4
ENAble Command .................................................................................................................... 6-5
ENErgize Command ................................................................................................................ 6-7
MODule Command ................................................................................................................... 6-7
NODe Command ...................................................................................................................... 6-8
PASsword Command ............................................................................................................... 6-8
RESet Command ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
SHOw Command ...................................................................................................................... 6-9
SILence Command .................................................................................................................. 6-9
Fixed System Macro Commands ................................................................................ 6-10
User Defined Macro Commands .................................................................................. 6-11
USER Button .......................................................................................................................... 6-11
Function Key Assignments .......................................................................................... 6-12

7 History and Reports ................................................................................ 7-1


History - Creating A Report ............................................................................................ 7-1
History XML file sample ........................................................................................................... 7-4
History - Creating An Archive ........................................................................................ 7-9
Retrieving an Archived History File ...................................................................................... 7-10

v
Table of Contents (Continued)

8 Graphic Editor .......................................................................................... 8-1


Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 8-1
Creating a New File ................................................................................................................. 8-2
Opening a File .......................................................................................................................... 8-3
Selecting Colors ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
Setting Pen Width .................................................................................................................... 8-4
Selecting Frame and/or Fill ..................................................................................................... 8-4
Selecting a Font ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
Drawing Tools ........................................................................................................................... 8-6
Saving a File ............................................................................................................................. 8-6

Appendix A .................................................................................................... A-1


UL Listed Industrial Ordering Information ..................................................................... A-1

Appendix B .................................................................................................... B-1


Latitude And Longitude Of Selected Cities ................................................................... B-1

Appendix C .................................................................................................... C-1


Manual: Core System Commands ................................................................................ C-1

Appendix D .................................................................................................... D-1


OS/2 To NT Conversion ................................................................................................. D-1

Appendix E .................................................................................................... E-1


Event Reporting: Special Cases - Pseudo Modules..................................................... E-1

Appendix F .................................................................................................... F-1


Command Script Definition Guidelines ......................................................................... F-1

Appendix G .................................................................................................... G-1


Supported Vector File Formats ......................................................................................G-1

Appendix H .................................................................................................... H-1


NCC-2F Driver Installation ............................................................................................. H-1

vi
List Of Figures

1-1 NCC-GL Block Diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-5


1-2 NCC-G Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 1-5
1-3 NCC-WAN Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 1-8

2-1 NCC-2F Module Board .............................................................................................................. 2-4


2-2 NCC-2F XNET Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-5
2-3 NCC-2F MNET Connections ..................................................................................................... 2-6
2-4 NCC-1F Module Board .............................................................................................................. 2-8
2-5 NCC-1F XNET Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-9
2-6 NCC-1F MNET Connections ................................................................................................... 2-10
2-7 Wiring for Ground Fault Detection (NCC-G Only) ................................................................... 2-11
2-8 CAB3 Enclosure Row And Module Positions .......................................................................... 2-13
2-9 NCC-2F HNET Connections ................................................................................................... 2-15
2-10 NCC-1F HNET Connections ................................................................................................... 2-15
2-11 SCD550 With NCC-2F And SCD-17/19LT Connection-Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations . 2-
17
2-12 SCD550 With NCC-2F And SCD-17/19LT Connection-Suitable For Desk Mount Installations 2-18
2-13 SCD550-19TM Connection With NCC-1F- Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations 2-19
2-14 SCD550-19TM /21TM Connection With NCC-1F-Suitable For Desk Mount Installations ....... 2-20
2-15 UPS Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................................... 2-21
2-16 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Security Key Error Default Screens ..................................... 2-22
2-17 Security Key Values Changed Screen .................................................................................... 2-23
2-18 Create A New Account ............................................................................................................. 2-25
2-19 Choose An Account Type ........................................................................................................ 2-25
2-20 Java Runtime Opening Screen ............................................................................................... 2-27
2-21 Java Runtime Installation Destination ..................................................................................... 2-27
2-22 Sentinel Driver Setup Opening Screen .................................................................................. 2-28
2-23 Sentinel Driver Licensing Agreement ...................................................................................... 2-28
2-24 Sentinel Driver Setup Type ...................................................................................................... 2-29
2-25 Sentinel Driver Custom Setup ................................................................................................. 2-29
2-26 Adobe Acrobat Opening Screen .............................................................................................. 2-30
2-27 Adobe Acrobat Licensing Agreement ...................................................................................... 2-30
2-28 Adobe Acrobat Reader Installation Destination ....................................................................... 2-31
2-29 Microsoft IIS Opening Screen ................................................................................................. 2-31

vii
List Of Figures (continued)
2-30 Microsoft Windows XP™ Welcome Screen............................................................................ 2-32
2-31 NCC MP7 Installation Opening Screen ................................................................................... 2-32
2-32 NCC MP7 Setup Type ............................................................................................................. 2-33
2-33 NCC MP7 Installation Destination ........................................................................................... 2-33
2-34 NCC MP7 Current Settings List ............................................................................................... 2-34
2-35 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation and Setup Screens ........................................... 2-35
2-36 NCC-G and NCC-GL Node and Module Identification Screens .............................................. 2-35
2-37 NCC-G/-GL and NCC-GL: MXL Unidentified Node Screens .................................................. 2-36
2-38 NCC-G Installation and Setup ................................................................................................. 2-36
2-39 NCC-G/GL Site Information ..................................................................................................... 2-36
2-40 NCCG Missing Site Information .............................................................................................. 2-37
2-41 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation Completion Screens .......................................... 2-37
2-42 Adding A New User From The User Manager Screen ............................................................. 2-39
2-43 New User Setup Window ........................................................................................................ 2-39
2-44 Group Memberships Window .................................................................................................. 2-40
2-45 Java Runtime Opening Screen ............................................................................................... 2-41
2-46 Java Runtime Installation Destination ..................................................................................... 2-42
2-47 Sentinel Driver Setup Opening Screen .................................................................................. 2-42
2-48 Sentinel Driver Licensing Agreement ...................................................................................... 2-43
2-49 Sentinel Driver Setup Type ...................................................................................................... 2-43
2-50 Sentinel Driver Custom Setup ................................................................................................. 2-44
2-51 Adobe Acrobat Opening Screen .............................................................................................. 2-44
2-52 Adobe Acrobat Licensing Agreement ...................................................................................... 2-45
2-53 Adobe Acrobat Reader Installation Destination ....................................................................... 2-45
2-54 NCC MP7 Installation Opening Screen ................................................................................... 2-46
2-55 NCC MP7 Setup Type ............................................................................................................. 2-46
2-56 NCC MP7 Installation Destination ........................................................................................... 2-47
2-57 NCC MP7 Current Settings List ............................................................................................... 2-47
2-58 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation and Setup Screens ........................................... 2-48
2-59 NCC-G and NCC-GL Node and Module Identification Screens .............................................. 2-49
2-60 NCC-G/-GL and NCC-GL: MXL Unidentified Node Screens .................................................. 2-49
2-61 NCC-G Installation and Setup ................................................................................................. 2-50
2-62 NCC-G/GL Site Information ..................................................................................................... 2-50
2-63 NCCG Missing Site Information .............................................................................................. 2-50
2-64 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation Completion Screens .......................................... 2-51
viii
List Of Figures (continued)
2-65 NCCG Command Center Close Window ................................................................................ 2-51
2-66 FireFinder Splash Screen ........................................................................................................ 2-52
2-67 Windows XP™ Add Printer Welcome Screen ......................................................................... 2-53
2-68 Windows XP™ Local or Network Printer ................................................................................. 2-53
2-69 Windows XP™ Printer Port Selection ..................................................................................... 2-54
2-70 Windows XP™ Printer Software Selection .............................................................................. 2-54
2-71 Windows XP™ Printer Sharing ............................................................................................... 2-55
2-72 Windows XP™ Printer Test Page ............................................................................................ 2-55
2-73 Add Printer Wizard Screen ...................................................................................................... 2-56
2-74 Enable Printer Spooling Screen .............................................................................................. 2-56
2-75 Printer Selection Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-57
2-76 Printer Not Shared Screen ...................................................................................................... 2-57
2-77 Printer Test Page Screen ........................................................................................................ 2-57
2-78 Printers Setup Screen: Event Logging .................................................................................... 2-58
2-79 Printer Emphasis Settings Selector ......................................................................................... 2-59
2-80 Printer Emphasis Presets ........................................................................................................ 2-59
2-81 Printers Setup Screen: Graphics Printer ................................................................................. 2-60
2-82 NCC-G/GL Template Placement ............................................................................................. 2-62

3-1 NCC Graphics Main Screen ...................................................................................................... 3-1


3-2 NCC-GL Main Screen ................................................................................................................ 3-2
3-3 Browser Image View - Single Device ........................................................................................ 3-4
3-4 Browser Image View - All Devices ............................................................................................. 3-4
3-5 Device View With Thumbnail Images ........................................................................................ 3-5
3-6 Device View With Image Selected ............................................................................................ 3-5
3-7 Event Window Format ............................................................................................................... 3-6
3-8 Event Window Format - Display Node Name Option ................................................................ 3-7
3-9 Event Icon Descriptions ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-10 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 3-10
3-11 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box HUB-4 Connected Node ............................................. 3-10
3-12 The Button Array ..................................................................................................................... 3-11
3-13 Control Point Window For A Device ........................................................................................ 3-11
3-14 Control Point Window - XLS Device With Components .......................................................... 3-12
3-15 Input Components Control Window ......................................................................................... 3-12
3-16 Output Components Control Window ................................................................................... 3-12
ix
List Of Figures (continued)

4-1 More Commands Window ......................................................................................................... 4-2


4-2 Setup Window ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-3 NCCG System Settings Window - Title Tab .............................................................................. 4-3
4-4 System Settings Window - Options Tab with Password Tab .................................................... 4-4
4-5 System Settings Window - Options Tab with Logon Tab .......................................................... 4-4
4-6 Touch Screen Keyboard ............................................................................................................ 4-6
4-7 System Settings Window - More Tab ........................................................................................ 4-6
4-8 System Settings Window - Display Tab ..................................................................................... 4-8
4-9 System Settings Window - Printers Tab .................................................................................... 4-9
4-10 Sample Graphic Printout (Shown in Portrait Mode) ................................................................ 4-11
4-11 NCCG System Settings Window - Set Time Tab ..................................................................... 4-12
4-12 NCCG System Settings Window - Logon Tab ......................................................................... 4-13
4-13 Edit a User Logon Window ...................................................................................................... 4-13
4-14 NCCG System Settings Window - Passwords Tab.................................................................. 4-15
4-15 Security Levels Windows - Upper View ................................................................................... 4-15
4-16 Security Levels Windows - Lower View ................................................................................... 4-16
4-17 Network Settings Window ....................................................................................................... 4-18
4-18 Network Settings Window - Scrolled ....................................................................................... 4-18
4-19 Editing Node Window .............................................................................................................. 4-19
4-20 NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup ............................................................................. 4-20
4-21 NCCG Node Edit Window ....................................................................................................... 4-21
4-22 NCCG Node Edit Window with TCP/IP Option ........................................................................ 4-22
4-23 MXL Node Edit Window MXL Network Connect ...................................................................... 4-25
4-24 MXL Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect ................................................................................ 4-25
4-25 XL3 Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect ................................................................................ 4-26
4-26 XLS Node Edit Window ........................................................................................................... 4-26
4-27 WAIO Node Edit Window ........................................................................................................ 4-27
4-28 WAN Components Network Map ............................................................................................. 4-27
4-29 Add WAN Component Window ............................................................................................... 4-28
4-30 Editing The HUB-4 In The WAN Network Map ........................................................................ 4-29
4-31 Editing The PSC-12 In The WAN Network Map ...................................................................... 4-31
4-32 Editing The NIC-C In The WAN Network Map ......................................................................... 4-31
4-33 WAIO Settings Window ........................................................................................................... 4-35
4-34 WAIO Editing Window ............................................................................................................. 4-36
x
List Of Figures (continued)
4-35 Device Edit Window - Input Tab .............................................................................................. 4-37
4-36 Select a Device to Edit Window (With Component) ................................................................ 4-38
4-37 Select a Device to Edit Window (With Sub-Module) ............................................................... 4-38
4-38 Device Edit Window - Graphics Tab ........................................................................................ 4-39
4-39 Device Icon Select Window ..................................................................................................... 4-39
4-40 Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup .......................................................................................... 4-40
4-41 Open Window .......................................................................................................................... 4-41
4-42 Device Icon Placement Editor - Bitmap Drawing ..................................................................... 4-41
4-43 Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing ........................................................................ 4-42
4-44 Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing With Zoom ...................................................... 4-42
4-45 Device Edit - Options Tab ........................................................................................................ 4-44
4-46 Macro Manager Window ......................................................................................................... 4-46
4-47 New Macro Name Window ...................................................................................................... 4-46
4-48 Macro Definition Editor ............................................................................................................ 4-47
4-49 Holiday Manager Window ....................................................................................................... 4-49
4-50 Event Manager Window .......................................................................................................... 4-50
4-51 New Event Name Window ....................................................................................................... 4-51
4-52 Event Definition Editor - Script Tab .......................................................................................... 4-51
4-53 Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab ...................................................................................... 4-52
4-54 Images Window - Base Tab ..................................................................................................... 4-56
4-55 Graphic Selector Window ........................................................................................................ 4-56
4-56 Select a Graphic Window ........................................................................................................ 4-57
4-57 Change Background Color Selector ........................................................................................ 4-57
4-58 Images Window - Images Tab ................................................................................................. 4-58
4-59 NCCG Graphic Editor .............................................................................................................. 4-58
4-60 Copy File Window ................................................................................................................... 4-59
4-61 Select Source File Window ..................................................................................................... 4-59
4-62 Map Network Drive Window .................................................................................................... 4-60
4-63 Select Destination Window ...................................................................................................... 4-61
4-64 Import XL-G Graphic Data Base Window ................................................................................ 4-62
4-65 XL-G File Selection Window .................................................................................................... 4-63
4-66 Image Data Base Rebuild Window .......................................................................................... 4-64
4-67 Please Wait! Window .............................................................................................................. 4-65
4-68 Completed! Window ................................................................................................................ 4-65
4-69 Image and Device Relationship Report Screen ...................................................................... 4-65
xi
List Of Figures (continued)
4-70 Selecting The Icons Button ..................................................................................................... 4-67
4-71 Icon Edit Initial Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-67
4-72 Create a New Icon Window ..................................................................................................... 4-68
4-73 Creating a New Icon ................................................................................................................ 4-69
4-74 Copy File Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 4-69
4-75 Using the Copy File ................................................................................................................. 4-70
4-76 Edit Icon or Description Window ............................................................................................. 4-70
4-77 Icon Editor ............................................................................................................................... 4-71
4-78 Edit Icon Or Description Window ............................................................................................. 4-72
4-79 Checking the Icon Edit Screen ................................................................................................ 4-72
4-80 Master Sound Level Control .................................................................................................... 4-73
4-81 System SoundsTab ................................................................................................................. 4-73
4-82 Individual Sound Edit Window ................................................................................................. 4-74
4-83 Save System Files Window ..................................................................................................... 4-75
4-84 DirectCD Format Utility - Format CD ....................................................................................... 4-77
4-85 DirectCD Format Utility - After A Format CD............................................................................ 4-77
4-86 DirectCD Format Utility - CD Ready ........................................................................................ 4-77
4-87 DirectCD Format Utility - Eject CD .......................................................................................... 4-78
4-88 Roxio Easy Media Creator 9 - Format CD ............................................................................... 4-78
4-89 Load System Parameters Window .......................................................................................... 4-80
4-90 Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration Window ......................................................................... 4-81
4-91 Change a Device State Window (With Component) ................................................................ 4-82
4-92 Change a Device State Window (With Sub-Module) ............................................................... 4-83

5-1 Enter Password Window - Password Only ................................................................................ 5-1


5-2 Enter Password Window - Logon and Password ...................................................................... 5-1
5-3 Product Information Window ..................................................................................................... 5-1
5-4 Button Array ............................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-5 Show or Print System Information Window ............................................................................... 5-5
5-6 List of Devices in Alarm Window ............................................................................................... 5-5
5-7 List of Supervisory States Window ............................................................................................ 5-6
5-8 List of Security States Window .................................................................................................. 5-6
5-9 List of Troubles Window ............................................................................................................ 5-7
5-10 List of Status Points Window ..................................................................................................... 5-7
5-11 List of Disabled Devices for Node Window ............................................................................... 5-8
xii
List Of Figures (continued)
5-12 Show Analog Voltages for Module Window ............................................................................... 5-8
5-13 List of Analog Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window ............................................... 5-9
5-14 Show Threshold Voltages for Module Window .......................................................................... 5-9
5-15 List of Threshold Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window ........................................ 5-10
5-16 Show Sensitivity Voltages for Module Window ........................................................................ 5-10
5-17 List of Sensitivity Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window ........................................ 5-11
5-18 Show Module Types for Node Window ................................................................................... 5-11
5-19 List of Module Types for Node Window ................................................................................... 5-12
5-20 List of Module Types and Firmware Revisions for an NCC ..................................................... 5-12
5-21 Show Device Types for Module Window ................................................................................. 5-13
5-22 List of Device Types in a Given Module Window .................................................................... 5-13
5-23 Show Device Messages for Module Window .......................................................................... 5-14
5-24 List of Device Messages in a Given Module Window .............................................................. 5-14
5-25 List of Node Status Information Window ................................................................................. 5-15
5-26 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL) .......................................................................... 5-15
5-27 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL on HUB-4) ......................................................... 5-16
5-28 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XLS)........................................................................... 5-16
5-29 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XL3 on HUB-4) .......................................................... 5-16
5-30 Connect Node Window ............................................................................................................ 5-17
5-31 Reset Operation Query Window .............................................................................................. 5-17
5-32 Show or Print Node Information Window ................................................................................ 5-18
5-33 Network Node Map With Group Button ................................................................................... 5-19
5-34 Group Setting Window ............................................................................................................ 5-20
5-35 Add A Group Window .............................................................................................................. 5-20
5-36 Edit A Group Node Map ........................................................................................................... 5-20
5-37 Group Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 5-21
5-38 Node Status Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 5-22
5-39 Node Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 5-22
5-40 NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Monitor Mode ............................................ 5-23
5-41 NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Control Mode ............................................ 5-23
5-42 System Node Status Bar - With WAIO .................................................................................... 5-24
5-43 WAIO Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 5-24
5-44 Matrix Showing Configured WAIO Nodes ............................................................................... 5-25
5-45 WAIO Module Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 5-25
5-46 Command Request Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 5-26
xiii
List Of Figures (continued)
5-47 Attention - Command Requested Dialog Box .......................................................................... 5-27
5-48 Printers Setup Screen ............................................................................................................. 5-29
5-49 Display Node Names ............................................................................................................... 5-30
5-50 Error Message Pop Up Window .............................................................................................. 5-31

6-1 Manual Command Entry Window .............................................................................................. 6-1


6-2 User Defined Commands Window .......................................................................................... 6-11

7-1 History Window ......................................................................................................................... 7-1


7-2 History: Setup Report Window - Files Tab ................................................................................. 7-2
7-3 History Destination Select Window ........................................................................................... 7-6
7-4 History: Setup Report Window - Date Range Tab ..................................................................... 7-6
7-5 Start Date Selection Window ..................................................................................................... 7-7
7-6 History: Setup Report Window - Devices Tab ........................................................................... 7-7
7-7 Select Device Window ............................................................................................................... 7-8
7-8 History: Setup Report Window - Filters Tab .............................................................................. 7-8
7-9 Archive History Window ............................................................................................................ 7-9

8-1 Graphic Editor ........................................................................................................................... 8-2


8-2 New Image Parameters Window ............................................................................................... 8-2
8-3 Base Image Window ................................................................................................................. 8-3
8-4 Set Pen Color Window .............................................................................................................. 8-3
8-5 Set Fill Color Window ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8-6 Set Pen Width Window .............................................................................................................. 8-4
8-7 Set Edit Text Window ................................................................................................................ 8-5
8-8 Save Window ............................................................................................................................ 8-6

xiv
List Of Tables
NCCG Family Of Products ................................................................................................. 1-1
UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications ..................................................................... 2-2
CAB Enclosure Components .............................................................................................. 2-12
NCC Graphics Package Part Numbers .............................................................................. 2-16
UL Listed System Type And Template Selection ................................................................ 2-62
System Status Messages ................................................................................................... 3-3
Module Commands ............................................................................................................ 6-7
Fixed Macro Commands .................................................................................................... 6-10
Function Key Assignments ................................................................................................. 6-13
External History Report File Format ................................................................................... 7-3
External History Report File Format - XML ........................................................................ 7-4
UL Listed Industrial Ordering Information ........................................................................... A-1
Manual: Core System Commands ..................................................................................... C-1
Command Script Syntax for Address Range ...................................................................... F-2

xv
NOT ICE T O USERS, INSTALLERS, AUT HORIT IES HAVING JURISDICT ION, AND OT HER INVOLVED PART IES

This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the
Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be
limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below.

Program feature or option Permitted in UL 864? (Y /N) Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864

Foreign country support No Checked Not checked


Not checked

xvi
CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features

1 General Description and Features


Introduction
The Network Command Center Graphics product family is now comprised of two
system series:
• The NCC-G Series, which includes the NCC-GL, NCC-1G, NCC-2G,
NCC-3G and NCC-4G software packages.
• The NCCWAN Series, which includes the NCCWAN1G, NCCWAN2G,
NCCWAN3G, NCCWAN4G, NCCWAN5G and NNCWAN6G software
packages.
These software packages, when operating in the appropriate UL 864 listed
computer, form the FireFinder Network Command Center Graphics system
(NCCG).
For new installations, the NCC-G and NCC-WAN software package includes the
FireFinder CD-ROM program, a software key, keyboard templates and this manual.
For conversions from NCC OS/2 to NCC, the NCC-G software package in-
cludes the FireFinder CD-ROM program and NCC-NT manual only (the OS/2
software key and keyboard templates are compatible with the NCC-G package.)

NET WORK COMMAND CENT ER GRAPHICS (NCCG)


Family Of Products
NCC-G Series NCCWAN Series
(Standard # Of # Of Interface
Interface (WAN Systems)
Systems) Nodes Nodes

NCC-GL 1 XNET/MNET NCCWAN1G 1 - 16 XNET/HNET

NCC-1G 1 - 16 XNET NCCWAN2G 1 - 32 XNET/HNET

NCC-2G 1 - 32 XNET NCCWAN3G 1 - 48 XNET/HNET

NCC-3G 1 - 48 XNET NCCWAN4G 1 - 64 XNET/HNET

NCC-4G 1 - 64 XNET NCCWAN5G 1 - 128* XNET/HNET

NCCWAN6G 1 - 256* XNET/HNET

* Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET

1-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NCCG Version 7 Enhancements


NCCG version 7 supports the Windows XP operating system when used with the
NCC-2F Network Interface Card. NCCG version 7 systems supporting XNET use
one NCC-2F, while NCCWAN version 7 systems supporting both XNET and HNET
use two NCC-2F Network Interface cards. NCCG version 7 is also compatible with the
Windows NT operating system and users of NCCG versions 5 and 6, using NCC-1F
Network Interface Cards, can upgrade to this version to use the new features.
NCC-2F Network Interface Cards are compatible with NCC-1F Network Interface
Cards. An NCCG version 7 system with Windows XP and NCC-2F card(s) can be
inserted into an existing XNET or HNET network with NCC NT systems containing
NCC-1F cards. In this case, the NCC NT systems must be upgraded to version 7.
NCCG version 7 also includes support for the NCCWAN6G software package that
allows up to 256 nodes. Nodes above 64, however, can only be connected using
NCCWAN components. The MXL network does not support nodes addressed
beyond 64.
NCCG version 7 also includes support for Roxio Easy CD Creator version 9 (XP
only), Autocad support, and support for the Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) card,
used for interfacing UL864 listed local fire alarm panels providing dry relay con-
tacts that can be used for event monitoring.

NCCG System Capabilities


All NCCG Systems use UL 864 listed computers, SIEMENS Models SCD-XP/
XPWAN-B or SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT (purchased separately). The Graphical User
Interface (GUI) of both the NCC-G and NCCWAN allow an operator to do the
following:
• View and acknowledge global system off-normal events
• View graphic displays
• View global system lists and data
• Control a single or a networked MXL/XLS system through the keyboard or
a pointing device
The NCC-G and NCCWAN are built around the Win32 interface which allows their
use on Windows NTTM 4.0 Service Pack 6 or higher or Windows XPTM Service Pack
2 or higher. Use with either operating system ensures efficient and timely process-
ing of events in a graphical environment. (Do not use Windows 2000.)
The operator can also perform the following functions from the NCCG, using
either a keyboard, touch screen or mouse:
• Acknowledging single events • Appending comment messages to events
• Silencing/unsilencing audible devices • Arming and disarming devices
• Resetting the system • Backing up system files
• Viewing system lists • Setting system features
• Changing detector sensitivities • Managing system passwords
• Controlling outputs • Changing system messages
• Generating history reports • Entering system macros
• Browsing system layouts

1-2
CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features

About This Manual


In general, the NCCG System leads the operator through the program with pop up
menus and dialog boxes. However, all of the functions available through NCCG
can be accessed using a variety of methods:
• Touch screen (including on-screen touch keyboard)
• Mouse
• Function keys
• Standard keyboard

To help you locate and interpret information easily, this guide uses consistent
visual cues and a standard key combination format. These conventions are
explained as follows:

 Indicates information for MOUSE and/or TOUCH SCREEN

¡ Indicates information for FUNCTION KEYS

 Indicates information for STANDARD KEYBOARD

NOTE: As you begin to read this guide and use the NCCG software, you
may occasionally notice one or more buttons that are “grayed
out” or lighter in color than the rest of the information on the
screen. This represents either a feature(s) that is currently
disabled and will be available in a future release of the NCCG
software, or it is not available at your current password level.

Description
The NCCG computer system may be rack mounted or desktop mounted. When it is
rack mounted, the equipment consists of the following:
• A rack mount main unit containing the industrial computer, hard disk, etc.
• A rack mount color monitor with optional touch screen (and/or mouse)
• A rack/desktop mounted keyboard

The NCC-G connects to the system using an internal PC card, either an NCC-1F,
used with Windows NTTM, or an NCC-2F, used with Windows XPTM, as shown in
Figures 1-1 and 1-2. The NCCWAN connects to systems using 2 internal PC
cards, either NCC-1F (NT) or NCC-2F (XP) as shown in Figure 1-3. One NCC-1F
or NCC-2F is used to connect to the MXL/XLS network (XNET) and the other is
used to connect to a COM-1 cabinet (HNET) and the WAN component boards,
HUB-4, NIC-C, and PSC-12. Each HUB-4 can connect to up to 4 MXL or XL3
panels.
A HUB-4 can also connect up to 64 Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) boards which
can be used for remote system monitoring. Refer to Figure 1-3
1-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Features
• Intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI)
• Global and local commands
• SVGA Graphics support (any format)
• Event display by color and icon indication
• Simultaneous terminal and graphics mode
• Time-based command generation
• Display of all networked MXL/XLS state changes
• User-definable macros
• User-definable device names
• Multiple access levels
• Disk-based history logging
• Context sensitive Help
• Touch screen, mouse and keyboard control
• Touch keyboard support
• Multiple printer support
• On-line graphics editing
• Menu driven system controls
• Large navigation control buttons
• Holiday functions
• Graphic import and editing on-line
• Independent input and output messages
• On-line ICON editor
• Image and device relationship report
• Disarm/arm device function
• Graphic print out based on event type
• Multiple filters for concise history report generation
• CXL-G and MXL-G graphic database importation
• Sound element assignment for system state and/or event type
• History data in ASCII format for use in external databases
• Graphics browser window
• Zeus XML database file importation
• NCCWAN component support to allow connection of modem connected
(CMI-300, MMX-1) panels.
• CD writer support for history archive and database backup.
• Control (Ack, Silence/Unsilence, Reset) MXL, XLS on the same XNET.
• Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) support
• Autocad support

1-4
CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features

NCC-GL OR NCC-GL

COM2 COM2
RS-485 connection via NCC-1F/2F RS-485 connection via NCC-1F/2F
(internal PC card) (internal PC card)

M-NET X-NET

MXL MXLR MXLR NIC-C

XLS

Figure 1-1
NCC-GL Block Diagram

NCC-G

COM2
RS-485 connection via NCC-1F/2F RS-485 connection via NCC-1F/2F
(internal PC card) (internal PC card)

MXL NIM-1R/-W NIM-1R/-W MXL


M-NET M-NET
X-NET

X-NET

XLS NIC-C NIM-1R/-W MXL


X-NET M-NET

To other
MXLs or XLSs

Figure 1-2
NCC-G Block Diagram

1-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NCCWAN Enhancements

Overview
The NCC WAN system acts as the supervisor and controller of all of the boards
in a COM-1 cabinet, which currently include the PSC-12, PSX-12, NIC-C and
HUB-4. The NCCWAN can be programmed to allow communication with either
the XL3 or MXL Fire Alarm Panels. The information received by the NCC (NCC
WAN) from the remote panels will be annunciated on the video monitor and
printed on the logging printer.
The NCC will also be able to communicate with up to three other XNETed NCC
computers located throughout the facility.
The XL3s or MXLs will connect in a star type configuration (HUB-4s) similar to
that of the CXL Systems. MXLs also have the ability of being connected to the
NCCs XNET in lieu of or in addition to the star configuration. An XLS can only be
connected to the NCC through XNET. NCCs can also be configured to operate
over the long distance communication package (NIM-1W/1M) in a Style 4 or Style
7 configuration.
The software enhancements used to provide the NCC WAN features are enabled by
selecting the proper options and purchasing the necessary hardware key.

Product Perspective
The NCC computer connects to the NIC-C located in a COM-1 cabinet via the
RS-485 HNET communication channel. The NIC-C is the long distance communi-
cating device for all other HNET modules located in the COM-1 cabinet.
The HUB-4, like the NIC-C, mounts in the CC-5 Card Cage and acts as a four
port modem interface to the MMX or CMI-300 located in the XL3 or MXLs. The
HUB-4 will support four MXLs, four XL3s or any combination of four panels. The
HUB-4 draws its power from the PSC-12 Power Supply but unlike the other CC-5
modules needs to have the 24 volts run externally to the bottom row connectors
of the card cage. The external power connection is required due to the 400mA
current requirements of the fully loaded HUB-4. The HUB-4 functions as a gate-
way between the NCC and the remotely connected XL3/MXL control panel trans-
mitting information between the two. Further, the HUB-4 provides all necessary
supervision to the XL3/MXL and is charged with notifying the NCC of any failure of
supervision for annunciation at the head end. (Note: Inter-panel logic is not avail-
able when connected via the HUB-4s.)
The HUB-4 can also act as a 4 port 485 interface to connect up to 64 Wide Area
Input Output cards, with a maximum of 16 per port. This application still uses the
24 volts run externally to the bottom row connectors of the CC-5 card cage. The
HUB-4 performs the supervision of the WAIOs and notifies the NCC of any failure
of supervision for annunciation at the head end. The HUB-4 also acts as the
gateway for all WAIO input monitoring and ouput control by exchanging informa-
tion between the WAIO and the NCC.

1-6
CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features

The NCC WAN broadcasts events to and routes commands from other NCCs
primarily over our proprietary XNET. The NCC WAN also provides for a backup
NCC to take over monitoring and control of a COM-1(s) in the event of a failure in
the primary NCC.

User Characteristics
The power and flexibility of the NCC WAN System provides multiple methods of
interface to other NCCs for annunciation of the remote MXLs, XL3s and XLSs.
This may include the use of two of the following three networking wiring methods.
1. HNET is required to allow communication between the NCC and the HUB-4s
(via NIC-C). The HNET can be wired in a Style 4 or Style 7 configuration
using either dedicated copper wire (per published constraints) or Fiber
modules. Multiple COM-1 cabinets can be connected together. A secondary
or backup NCC can be provided to connect to the COM-1 cabinets in addition
to the primary NCC.
2. XNET can be used to provide long distance communication (employing the
Modem Bridge) as well as intermixing COM-1s and MXLs and XLSs
connected via XNET to the system. The use of XNET also allows the Local/
Global operational feature to be added to the WAN Package. (Up to 4 NCCs
can be connected on XNET.)
3. ETHERNET (dedicated LAN) can also be used with the WAN Package
basically taking the place of the XNET for NCC to NCC communications.
Care must be taken prior to deciding to use Ethernet communication and it is
strongly recommended that you contact Siemens Fire Safety Applications
prior to proceeding (this may effect UL Listing). At least one NCC must be
connected via XNET, HNET or both to use this feature.

When configuring the NCC WAN System, it is important to note that one or more
networks may be involved. Should the installation require only one NCC computer
connected to the COM-1 panel to supervise the internal modules, then only HNET
is required. However, if two or more NCC computers are required, you must make
provisions for a second network "XNET" (ETHERNET can be used also).

1-7
1-8
M-NET
CMI-300 MXL

NCC WAN
M-NET
CMI-300 MXL

COM2 COM1
RS-485 CONNECTION VIA NCC-1F/2F RS-485 CONNECTION VIA NCC-1F/2F M-NET
(INTERNAL PC CARD) (INTERNAL PC CARD) CMI-300 MXL
HNET

M-NET M-NET
MXL NIM-1R/W NIC-C HUB-4 CMI-300 MXL

HNET 300 BAUD MODEM


XNET (INTERNAL) COMMUNICATIONS

HUB-4 TO OTHER
M-NET CMI-300s
MXL NIM-1R/W
MAX. 16

Figure 1-3
WAIO WAIO WAIO
PSC-12
HUB-4 TO OTHER
WAIOs
FACP FACP FACP

NCC-WAN Block Diagram


485 INTERFACE
TO OTHER COMMUNICATIONS 4 INPUTS
HUB-4s 4 OUTPUTS
NCC WAN COM1 PER WAIO
TO OTHER
NIC-Cs
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

TO OTHER MXLs
AND NCC WANs
Chapter 2 Installation

2 Installation
System Requirements - Software
The Network Command Center Graphics product family operates with the following
software:
• Connection over XNET - MXL operating software 7.00 or higher with
CSG-M 7.01 or higher and FireFinder-XLS™ Rev. 3.1.27 or higher with
Zeus 3.2.0015 or higher is required.
• Connection using a HUB-4 - MXL operating software 5.06 or higher and
CMI-300 Rev 2 or higher is required.
• Display of supervisory and security reports at NCCWAN - MXL oper-
ating software revision 10.14 (6.14 MXL-IQ) and CSG-M 10.07 or higher
is required.

The NCC-G programs require Windows XP Professional™, Service Pack 2 or


higher operating system. Windows XP™ comes pre-installed in computer models
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B and SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT.

NCC-G version 7 can also be used to upgrade NCC systems running on the
Windows NT™ Version 4.0 operating system, Service Pack 6 or higher. Examples
of items not useable on NT are the latest CD writer program and USB ports.

• Each MXL/XLS in the system must be loaded with a valid configuration.


The MXL configuration must be edited and compiled using CSG-M
Version 7.01 or higher. The XLS configuration must be edited and
compiled using Zeus Version 3.2.0015 or higher. The NCC-G must be
included in the node map of each MXL/XLS connected to it. Refer to the
Appendix Manual for CSG-M Revision 7.01, P/N 315-095005, for further
information.

System Requirements - Hardware


Computer systems with fewer capabilities may work at the expense of system
performance. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. cannot guarantee that any
NCCG system will work with computers other than the models listed above, as
tests are performed only with the UL recognized model offered.

See Appendix A for UL Listed Industrial Ordering Information.

2-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications


SCD-XP-B, SCD-XP-BT, SCD-XPWAN-B,
MODEL*
SCD-XPWAN-BT **
CPU Pentium 4 - 2.8 Ghz
Operating System Window s XP Professional, SP2 or higher
RAM 1 GB
Hard Disk 80 GB
DVD-ROM CD-R/W
Floppy 1.44MB
Graphics Card On Board CPU Card
Monitors** SCD-17L-2 or SCD-19L-2
Touch Screen Option SCD-17LT-2 or SCD-19LT-2
Serial Ports 2 RS232, COM1, COM2
Parallel Ports LPT1, LPT2
(Monochrome) Printer PAL-1

*The industrial computer is UL 864 and UL 1076 listed.


**The computer and monitor are sold in kits:
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B-17L-2 = P4 computer + 17" LCD monitor
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B-19L-2 = P4 computer + 19" LCD monitor
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B-17LT-2 = P4 computer + 17" LCD touch monitor
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B-19LT-2 = P4 computer + 19" LCD touch monitor
NOTE: To obtain 4 hours of standby pow er, the ICS Lifeline Model
9300057 UPS is recommended.

NOTE: Always remove power (Battery and AC) and wait at least 10
seconds to allow the supply voltages to decay before installing or
removing any module, cable or wiring.

Pointing Devices
In addition to all of the requirements listed above, a typical system includes one
of the following pointing devices:
• a mouse (included in the SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT computer models)
• touch screen (such as the SIEMENS Model SCD-17LT-2 or SCD-19LT-2).
The mouse and the touch screen may be used simultaneously.

Printing Devices
The PAL-1 24-pin wide carriage logging printer (P/N 500-692407) is mandatory
for UL listed systems.
The following optional Windows NT/XP™ supported printers may be used in
addition to the PAL-1:
• 9- or 24-pin EPSON compatible (standard carriage) Centronics interface
• Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2/3 (laser graphics printing on LPT2)

2-2
Chapter 2 Installation

Hard Disk Capacity


The required storage capacity of the hard disk in a given system is totally dependent
on the number and type of graphical images stored. Bit mapped images (*.BMP)
typically consume large amounts of storage (300K to 900K each). Other formats, for
example *.PCX or *.GIF images, offer degrees of compression approaching 10 to 1.
It is estimated that a 170 Megabyte hard disk will accommodate approximately 220
.BMP full screen images to more than 6,000 .PCX line drawing images.

Hardware Connections

NCC-2F
The NCC-2F comes pre-installed in new computer models SCD-XP/XPWAN-B
and SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT running Windows XP™. Refer to Figure 2-1.
Electrical Ratings NCC-2F: 5 VDC @ 250mA
Network (XNET/MNET/HNET): 8V P-P, 75mA max

XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card


The NCC-2F provides the computer with a direct RS-485 connection to the XLS's
XNET and the MXL’s XNET or MNET (NCC-GL). This eliminates the requirement
that the computer be located within 25 feet of a NIM-1R. The NCC-2F operates in
both Style 4 and Style 7 modes.
The module installs in the computer and requires an empty PCI slot. The NCC-2F
can be set to any standard PC COM port address and interrupt. UL listed comput-
ers model SCD-XP/XPWAN-B-17L-2/19L-2 and SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT-17LT-2/
19LT-2 (purchased from Siemens Fire Safety) will be shipped with the NCC-2F
card installed and configured for XNET as COM3.

NCC-2F CONFIGURATION
The NCC-2F is assigned to a standard COM port by WIndows XP™ when the
drivers are installed. The installation process usually takes the next available
COM port. There are no jumpers involved. The NCC-G can use any COM port for
XNET and HNET, but it needs to be told at startup if it is not using the standard
assigned COM ports. COM port assignments will stay as long as the NCC-2F
card is plugged in the same PCI slot.
Note: There are no jumpers to configure on the NCC-2F.

2-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

P2
DS2

DS1

DS4
U4
DS5
1

1 S1
2
3
4
5 NCC-2F
5

TB1
S2
P1

Figure 2-1
NCC-2F Module Board

NCC-2F INSTALLATION
Remove all NCCG power before installation.
To install the NCC-2F in a computer in which it is not factory installed, follow the
steps listed below:
1. Unscrew the two knurled knobs on the rear of the NCC-G computer.
2. Slide the cover back an inch or so and lift it off.
3. The NCC-2F installs into any free PCI 5V compliant slot in the NCC-G
computer. Select a slot and remove the blank cover, keeping the screw.
4. Remove the terminal block from the NCC-2F by removing the two screws that
hold it to the bracket.
5. Place the NCC-2F into the open slot so that the NCC-2F card edge extends
through the opening in the back of the PC.
6. Align the NCC-2F with the card edge connector in the NCC-G computer and
press it firmly into place.
7. Secure the NCC-2F by installing the screw that held the blank cover. (Refer to
Step 3.)
8. Replace the NCC-G computer cover and tighten the knurled knobs.
9. Reattach the terminal block by sliding it onto the NCC-2F card edge and install
the two screws. This is a keyed connection and will only install one way.
10. After the NCC-2F card is installed in the NCC-G computer, install the NCC-2F
drivers following the instructions in Appendix H.

2-4
Chapter 2 Installation

PAIR B
(OMIT FOR STYLE 4)
SUPERVISED
POWER LIMITED
TO ADDITIONAL
PAIR A NIM-1Rs, NIM-1Ws,
SUPERVISED NCC-2Fs OR NIC-Cs
POWER LIMITED

DO NOT USE DO NOT USE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5

NCC-2F
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCATED INSIDE NCC 1 2 3 4
MOM-4
NOTE: TB3 OR TB4
SEE NOTE 7 DO NOT USE IF THE NCC IS LOCATED NIM-1R / NIM-1W
AT THE END OF THE XNET
NIC-C NETWORK, INSTALL EOLR
P/N 140-820350 ACROSS
(MUST BE IN SAME ENCLOSURE AS THE PMI)
TERMINALS 1 & 2 AND 3 & 4. NOTES:
ONE SLOT OF CC-5 1. No EOLR required for NIC-C.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2. 18 AWG min., 12 AWG max.
3. 80 Ohms max. per pair.
Unshielded twisted pair - .5µF line to line
Shielded twisted pair - .3µF line to line, .4µF line to shield
DO NOT USE
4. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair.
5. Terminate shields at one end only.
Refer to Wiring Specification for MXL, MXL-IQ and 6. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
MXLV Systems, P/N 315-092772 revision 6 or 7. CC-5 terminals 9 - 14 are not connected and can be used
higher, for additional wiring information. to tie shields together.
8. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <100K ohms
on pins 3-4, 7-8.
9. Each pair independently supervised.
Figure 2-2
NCC-2F XNET Connections

NCC-2F ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS


Network (XNET/MNET)
The XNET/MNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on
the rear of the NCC-2F. The primary pair (or network A) is on terminals 1 and 2.
The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4.
For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR on terminals 3 and 4.
See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for wiring details.
For Style 7 networks, connect to both the primary and secondary
pairs. See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for wiring details.

Shields
Shields for the XNET/MNET must be connected at ONE and ONLY ONE end of
the network. See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3.

Earth Ground
A good earth ground must be provided for proper transient protection of the
NCC-2F and the computer. Connect a separate ground to terminal 5 on the
NCC-2F. See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3.

2-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NOTES: MNET END POINT


STYLE 4 ONLY
1. 18 AWG minimum.
2. 80 ohms max. per pair.
3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. TO MMB-1/-2/-3,
SMB-1/-2, PSR-1, 1
4. Terminate the shield at one and only one MOI-7, PS-5N7,
place in the system. NCC-1F OR NCC-2F * 2

NCC-2F
5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
3
6. Maximum voltage 8V P-P.
7. Maximum current 75mA. * 4

8. Each pair independently supervised. 5


* EOLR
120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5%

TB1
P/N 140-820350

TO MMB-1/-2/-3, SMB-1/-2, PSR-1,


MOI-7, PS-5N7, NCC-1F OR NCC-2F

MNET MID POINT


NETWORK B (SECONDARY) STYLE 4 OR STYLE 7
SUPERVISED
OMIT THIS PAIR FOR STYLE 4

1
TO MMB-1/-2/-3,
SMB-1/-2, 2

NCC-2F
PSR-1,
MOI-7,
PS-5N7, 3
NCC-1F
OR 4
NCC-2F
5

NETWORK A

TB1
(PRIMARY)
SUPERVISED

1 2 3 4

MMB-1/-2/-3 SMB-1/-2 PSR-1 MOI-7 PS-5N7


TB1 TB1 TB4 TB1 TB1

Figure 2-3
NCC-2F MNET Connections

Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL)


The NCC-2F provides electrical isolation between the computer and the XNET.
This allows for ground fault detection to be enabled on the XNET. Ground fault
detection is only possible if the NCC is connected to XNET with an NCC-2F.
Ground fault detection must be enabled at a NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C. Select one
and only one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C in the system where the ground fault is to be
detected. You must locate the NIM-1R/-1W in a cabinet with either an MMB-1/-2/-3,
SMB-1/-2, or a PSR-1. See Figure 2-7 for the wiring diagram.
If the XNET is divided into multiple sections of copper wire using fiber optic
segments, ground fault detection can be enabled at one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C
for each section of copper wire. Refer to the NIC-C Installation Instructions, P/N
315-033240 if you wish to use the NIC-C to provide ground fault detection.

2-6
Chapter 2 Installation

NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 or WAIOs


A second NCC-2F card, P/N 500-849430, is required to support the WAN fea-
tures. Two NCC-2Fs come pre-installed in computer models SCD-XPWAN-B and
SCD-XPWAN-BT. If you are using a computer other than these models, you must
purchase one additional NCC-2F card. The second NCC-2F card is part of the
NCCWAN kit and must be installed as COM5 (default) on the computer.
The NCC-2F provides the computer with a direct RS-485 connection to the HNET
through the NIC-C card. The NCC-2F operates in both Style 4 and Style 7 modes.
1. The module installs in the computer and requires an empty PCI slot.
2. The NCC-2F should be set to COM5 (default) but other COM port
assignments can be used if entered during NCC-G setup.

NCC-1F
Computers running Windows NT™ can use the NCC-G version 7. The network
interface card used for the NT system remains the NCC-1F.
Electrical Ratings NCC-1F: 5 VDC @ 250mA
Network (XNET/MNET/HNET): 8V P-P, 190mA max

XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card


The NCC-1F provides the Windows NT™ equipped computer with a direct RS-
485 connection to the XLS's XNET and the MXL’s XNET or MNET (NCC-GL).
This eliminates the requirement that the computer be located within 25 feet of a
NIM-1R. The NCC-1F operates in both Style 4 and Style 7 modes.
The module installs in the computer and requires an empty 16-Bit ISA slot. The
NCC-1F can be set to any standard PC COM port address and interrupt. UL
listed computers model SCD550-19M/-21M and SCD550-19TM/-21TM (pur-
chased from Siemens Fire Safety), ship with the NCC-1F card installed and
configured for COM2.

NCC-1F CONFIGURATION
The NCC-1F comes from the factory configured as COM 2. In most cases this
does not need to be changed. If COM 2 is not available, use the table below to
select the desired COM port. Be sure to configure the computer to use the same
port and IRQ for XNET or MNET communications. See Figure 2-4 for the location
of the jumpers.
CONFIGURING THE NCC-1F

COM1 JP 1 JP 2 ADDRESS JP3 (IRQ)


1* A C 3F8-3FF 4
2* A D 2F8-2FF 3
3 B C 3E8-3EF 4
4 B D 2E8-2EF 3
* Be sure to di sable the NCCGs computer's
i nternal COM port or hardware confli cts wi ll ari se.
2-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-4
NCC-1F Module Board

The NCC-1F also provides IRQs 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. These can be
used in conjunction with COM 3 and COM 4 if IRQs 3 and 4 are used by other
hardware. When using these IRQs be sure that no other hardware has been
assigned to the IRQ used on the NCC-1F.
If COM 3 and COM 4 are being used and IRQ settings 3 and 4 are occupied, it is
recommended to use IRQ settings 10 and 11. However, if further hardware
conflicts exist, IRQ settings 5, 7, 9, 12, 14, and 15 are also available.
Note: IRQ settings 14 and/or 15 are usually reserved as IDE controllers.

NCC-1F INSTALLATION
Remove all NCCG power before installation.
To install the NCC-1F follow the steps listed below:
1. Unscrew the two knurled knobs on the rear of the UL 864 listed computer.
2. Slide the cover back an inch or so and lift it off.
3. The NCC-1F installs into any free 16-Bit ISA slot in the computer. Select a
slot and remove the blank cover, keeping the screw.
4. Remove the terminal block from the NCC-1F by removing the two screws that
hold it to the bracket.
5. Place the NCC-1F into the open slot so that the NCC-1F card edge extends
through the opening in the back of the PC.
6. Align the NCC-1F with the card edge connector in the computer and press it
firmly into place.
7. Secure the NCC-1F by installing the screw that held the blank cover. (Refer to
Step 3.)
8. Replace the computer cover and tighten the knurled knobs.
9. Reattach the terminal block by sliding it onto the NCC-1F card edge and
install the two screws. This is a keyed connection and will only install one way.
2-8
Chapter 2 Installation

PAIR B
(OMIT FOR STYLE 4)
SUPERVISED
POWER LIMITED
TO ADDITIONAL
PAIR A NIM-1Rs, NIM-1Ws,
SUPERVISED NCC-1Fs OR NIC-Cs
POWER LIMITED

DO NOT USE DO NOT USE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6

NCC-1F
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCATED INSIDE NCC 1 2 3 4
MOM-4
NOTE: TB3 OR TB4
SEE NOTE 7 DO NOT USE IF THE NCC IS LOCATED NIM-1R / NIM-1W
AT THE END OF THE XNET
NETWORK, INSTALL EOLR
NIC-C P/N 140-820350 ACROSS
TERMINALS 1 & 2 AND 3 & 4.
ONE SLOT OF CC-5
NOTES:
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1. No EOLR required for NIC-C.
2. 18 AWG min., 12 AWG max.
3. 80 Ohms max. per pair.
DO NOT USE
Unshielded twisted pair - .5µF line to line
Shielded twisted pair - .3µF line to line, .4µF line to shield
4. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair.
5. Terminate shields at one end only.
6. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
7. CC-5 terminals 9 - 14 are not connected and can be used to tie shields together.
8. Maximum voltage 8V P-P.
9. Each pair independently supervised.
10. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <50K ohms on NIC-C pins 3-4, 7-8.

Figure 2-5
NCC-1F XNET Connections

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Network (XNET/MNET)
The XNET/MNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on
the rear of the NCC-1F. The primary pair (or network A) is on terminals 1 and 2.
The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4.
For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR on terminals 3 and 4.
See Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for wiring details.
For Style 7 networks, connect to both the primary and secondary
pairs. See Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for wiring details.

Shields
Shields for the XNET/MNET must be connected at ONE and ONLY ONE end of
the network. If you wish to terminate the shields at the computer, use terminal 5
on the NCC-1F. See Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6.

Earth Ground
A good earth ground must be provided for proper transient protection of the
NCC-1F and the computer. Connect a separate ground to terminal 6 on the
NCC-1F. See Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-6.

2-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NOTES:
1. 18 AWG minimum.
2. 80 ohms max per pair.
3. Use twisted pair or
shielded twisted pair.
4. Terminate the shield at
one and only one place in
the system.
5. Power Limited to NFPA 70
per NEC 760.
6. Maximum voltage 8V P-P.
7. Maximum current 190mA.
8. Each pair independently
supervised.

Figure 2-6
NCC-1F MNET Connections

Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL)


The NCC-1F provides electrical isolation between the computer and the XNET.
This allows for ground fault detection to be enabled on the XNET. Ground fault
detection is only possible if the NCC is connected to XNET with an NCC-1F.
Ground fault detection must be enabled at a NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C. Select one
and only one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C in the system where the ground fault is to be
detected. You must locate the NIM-1R/-1W in a cabinet with either an MMB-1/-2/-
3, SMB-1/-2, or a PSR-1. See Figure 2-7 for the wiring diagram.
If the XNET is divided into multiple sections of copper wire using fiber optic
segments, ground fault detection can be enabled at one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C
for each section of copper wire. Refer to the NIC-C Installation Instructions, P/N
315- 033240 if you wish to use the NIC-C to provide ground fault detection.

2-10
Chapter 2 Installation

NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 or WAIOs


A second NCC-1F card, P/N 500-895966, is required to support the WAN fea-
tures. One NCC-1F comes pre-installed in computer models SCD550 and
SCD550T. The second NCC-1F card is part of the NCCWAN kit and must be
installed as COM1 on the computer.
The NCC-1F provides the computer with a direct RS-485 connection to the HNET
through the NIC-C card. The NCC-1F operates in both Style 4 and Style 7
modes.
1. The module installs in the computer and requires an empty 16-bit ISA slot.
2. The NCC-1F used for HNET must be set to COM1 and IRQ 4 for the PC
COM port address and interrupt.
3. COM1 on the PC's main board must be disabled in the BIOS.
4. COM2 and IRQ 3 is the required setting for the NCC-1F that is used for
XNET.
5. Both NCC1Fs are configured as shown on page 2-7.

TB3 NIM-1R/-1W IN TB3


12 13 14 15 16

_
2 USE ONLY ONE
MOM-4 TB5
1
+

NIM-1R/-1W IN TB4
12 13 14 15 16

TB4

MOM-2
TB7 TB4
2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

_ +

Figure 2-7
Wiring for Ground Fault Detection (NCC-G Only)

2-11
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

COM-1 INSTALLATION
The SIEMENS COM-1 is the NCCWAN communication interface hardware that is
installed in a CAB-1X, CAB-2, or CAB3 cabinet and which consists of the CC-5,
PSC-12, PSX-12, NIC-C and HUB-4 modules.
Follow Steps 1 through 20 for installation. Each step is thoroughly explained in
the referenced installation instructions.
1. Install the desired enclosure; CAB1-X, CAB2 or CAB3. Refer to the CAB
Enclosure Components table below to select the appropriate installation
instructions. Refer also to Figure 2-8 on the next page for information on
CAB rows and module placement.
2. Install the TSW-2 Tamper Switch when required for UL 1076 applications.
When the TSW-2 is used in COM-1 applications, it must be connected to a
TRI series device that is part of an MXL system (See the TRI-S/D/R installa-
tion instructions, P/N 315-096242). The MXL system will report the tamper
switch activation in the COM-1.
The connector termination on the TSW-2 wires must be removed and the
wires connected to the switch input of the TRI device. The TSW-2 switch is
a normally closed contact when the COM-1 enclosure door is in the closed
position.
The TSW-2 is installed in the rectangular slot provided on either the right or
left side of the backbox depending on which direction the door opens. The
TSW-2 is located on the backbox side opposite the side the door is hinged
to.
The TRI must be mounted inside the COM-1 enclosure. The TRI device can
be mounted to a pair of the center threaded posts on the CAB-MP. A male to
female (#10-32 male thread) standoff can be used to provide clearance
between the TRI device and the CAB-MP.
Systems for UL 1076 applications require at least one vacant position on a
CAB-MP for mounting of the TRI device.

CAB ENCLOSURE COMPONENTS


CAB Installation Instruction
Component Description / Color Part Number

CAB1-X Complete CAB1-X Si ngle Row* Enclosure - Black 315-034369

CAB2-BB CAB2 Two Row Backbox - Black


315-033009
CAB3-BB CAB3 Three Row Backbox - Black
CAB2-XBD CAB2 Transponder Door for Two Row Backbox - Black
315-033768
CAB3-XBD CAB3 Transponder Door for Three Row Backbox - Black
Mounti ng Plate for CAB enclosures -Si lver (OPTIONAL i n the CAB2
CAB-MP 315-033012
and CAB3 - One CAB-MP i s needed for each CAB Row, i f used)
CAB1-TK Flush Tri m Ki t for CAB1-COM - Black
CAB2-TK Flush Tri m Ki t for CAB2 - Black 315-033013
CAB3-TK Flush Trim Ki t for CAB3 - Black

*A Si ngle Row has the capaci ty to mount up to 4 modules usi ng the CAB-MP Mounti ng Plate.

2-12
Chapter 2 Installation

Outer Door Backbox


CAB3-XBD CAB3-BB

One “Row”

One
Module
Position
PSC-12

Two
Module
Positions
CC-5

Each CAB Backbox


“Row” requires a
CAB-MP in order
to mount modules
CC-5 Cards:
HUB-4
NIC-C
Figure 2-8
CAB3 Enclosure Row And Module Positions

3. Pull the field wiring into the backbox and dress it to approximately where it
will go.
4. Install the CC-5 on a CAB-MP mounting plate (Refer to the CC-5 Installation
Instructions, P/N 315-099319). Do not install the card guides in the CC-5 at
this time.
The Mounting Plate may be located either “IN” or “OUT” of the enclosure to
perform this installation procedure. If the Mounting Plate is located “IN” the
enclosure you will have to gain access to it by opening the enclosure Inner
and Outer doors. If the Mounting Plate is located outside of the enclosure,
place it in front of you so that the word “TOP” is at the top and away from you.
5. Install the PSC-12 on a CAB-MP mounting plate (Refer to the PSC-12
Installation Instructions, P/N 315-099321).
6. Install the PTB in the bottom of the CAB enclosure (Refer to the PTB Instal-
lation Instructions, P/N 315-034877).
7. Install Field Wiring.
Dress the field wiring that will be going to the CC-5. Strip the insulation from
the wiring, but do not connect the wires to the screw terminals.
8. If the PSC-12 and CC-5 were installed on the CAB-MP “OUT” of the enclo-
sure, mount the complete assembly in the CAB row.

2-13
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

9. Connect Field Wiring to CC-5 screw terminals, as appropriate.


10. Install card guides in CC-5.
11. Install the NIC-C in a CC-5, if applicable (Refer to the NIC-C Installation
Instructions, P/N 315-099320).
12. Install the HUB-4 in a CC-5, if applicable (Refer to the HUB-4 Installation
Instructions, P/N 315-099458).
13. On the PSC-12, set the circuit breaker for the battery to the OFF position.
Verify that the AC dedicated circuit breaker is turned off at the mains.
14. Connect the AC mains and battery wiring to the PTB.
15. Connect the PTB output to the PSC-12.
16. Turn on the dedicated circuit breaker.
17. Turn on the PSC-12 circuit breaker for the battery.
18. The System will initialize in default mode.
19. Using the NCC-G, transfer the site-specific program to the COM-1 system.
Refer to this manual for further information. Upon completion, the system will
automatically initialize.
20. Any problem found will be reported in the NCC-G. Identify all discrepancies
and correct them until the system reports SYSTEM STATUS: NORMAL.

COM-1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS


Network (HNET) with NCC2F
The HNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on the rear
of the second NCC-2F (addressed as COM-1). The primary pair (or network A) is
on terminals 1 and 2. The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4.
For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR on terminals 1, 2, 3 and
4. See Figure 2-9 for NCC-2F HNET connections.
For Style 7 networks, connect to both the primary and secondary
pairs. See Figure 2-9 for wiring details.

Network (HNET) with NCC1F


The HNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on the rear
of the second NCC-1F (addressed as COM-1). The primary pair (or network A) is
on terminals 1 and 2. The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4.
For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR on terminals 1, 2, 3 and
4. See Figure 2-10 for NCC-1F HNET connections.
For Style 7 networks, connect to both the primary and secondary
pairs. See Figure 2-10 for wiring details.

2-14
Chapter 2 Installation

* EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5%


P/N 140-820350 NETWORK B
(SECONDARY)
SUPERVISED

*
NETWORK A OMIT THIS PAIR
(PRIMARY) FOR STYLE 4
SUPERVISED

NETWORK A
(PRIMARY)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SUPERVISED
TB1 5 4 3 2 1

NCC-2F 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

NIC-C

NOTES: ONE SLOT OF CC-5


1. 24 AWG min., 12 AWG max.
2. 80 Ohms max. per pair between CC-5s.
3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair.
4. Terminate shields at one and only one NCC-2F or NIC-C.
5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
6. Maximum voltage 8V P-P.
7. Maximum current 75mA during message transmission.
8. Each pair independently supervised.
9. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <100K ohms.

Figure 2-9
NCC-2F HNET Connections

TB1 NCC-1F
* EOLR
6 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5%
P/N 140-820350
5
*
4

3
SHIELD *
2
NETWORK B
1 (SECONDARY)
SUPERVISED
OMIT THIS PAIR
SHIELD FOR STYLE 4
HNET END POINT

NETWORK A
(PRIMARY)
SUPERVISED

NOTES: NETWORK A
1. 24 AWG min., 12 AWG max. (PRIMARY)
SUPERVISED
2. 80 Ohms max. per pair between CC-5s. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair.


4. Terminate the shield at one and only one NCC-1F or NIC-C. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
6. Maximum voltage 8V P-P.
7. Maximum current 75mA during message transmission.
8. Each pair independently supervised.
ONE SLOT OF CC-5 WITH NIC-C INSTALLED
9. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <100K ohms.

Figure 2-10
NCC-1F HNET Connections

2-15
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Computer Connection with NCC-2F


(Refer to Figure 2-11 or 2-12, as applicable)

Computer Connection with NCC-1F


(Refer to Figure 2-13 or 2-14, as applicable)
After the NCC-2F/-1F card has been configured and properly connected, follow
the steps listed below:
1. Connect the monitor to the power outlet and to the video outlet on the main
unit.
2. Connect the system printer to the NCCG parallel printer port 1 (LPT1). The
printer cable cannot leave the room in which the NCC-G is located. For a UL
listed installation, a model PAL-1 parallel printer is required.
3. Connect the software key to the NCC-G parallel printer port 2 (LPT2). The
part numbers for the NCC-G graphics packages are shown in the following
table:
NCC Graphics Package Part Number Number Of Nodes
NCC-GL 500-699032 1
NCC-1G 500-699028 1-16
NCC-2G 500-699029 1-32
NCC-3G 500-699030 1-48
NCC-4G 500-699031 1-64
NCCWAN1G 500-648761 1-16
NCCWAN2G 500-648762 1-32
NCCWAN3G 500-648763 1-48
NCCWAN4G 500-648764 1-64
NCCWAN5G 500-648462 1-128*
NCCWAN6G 500-650216 1-256*
* Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.

4. Connect the computer into the power outlet. NOTE: Prior to powering-up the
computer, remove all diskettes from the A: drive.
5. Power up the computer and the color monitor. Check to see that the computer
system goes through power up diagnostics.

Touch Screen Installation


The Touch Screen comes preinstalled in Model SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT. For infor-
mation on the touch screen, refer to the EloGraphics Manual that accompanied
the computer hardware.

2-16
SCD-17LT-2/19LT-2

LCD Monitor
(rear view)

See Notes 3 & 4

VGA
DC12V TOUCH VIDEO
12V 5A PIN 1 - Fault Out
Power PIN 2 - Fault COM
AC Main TRI Installed in MXL
Parallel Printer (rear view) Supply
120 VAC 60Hz See Note 15

120 VAC/60 Hz
Power
Connection Keyboard & Mouse
Box (not Computer (rear view) (Using Splitter Cable)
required for
Rack Mount 1
See Notes 3 and 5 2
or Console 3
Video

4
5
COM 1

Installations) 6
7
5 5 8
LPT 1

4 4
Junction 3 3 LAN 1
Box and Cover 2 2
LPT 2

COM 2

Approved Flexible 1 1
(user supplied)
Conduit Connector LAN 2
(user supplied)
USB
CPU

Flexible Conduit
PORT

CARD
CARD
CARD (For NCC Key)

COM 3

(User Supplied)
PORTS

PORTS

COM 5*
SERIAL

SOUND

NCC-2F

NCC-2F
Approved 1/2” Flexible
MONITOR

PARALLEL

Metallic/Nonmetallic
Conduit (user supplied) See NCC-2F Installation Instructions, P/N 315-049430
Junction
Box (Default COM Post Assignment Shown)
AC Main (user
supplied) * For NCCWAN Only
Bushing 120 VAC 60Hz
(user
supplied) Conduit

NOTES: 8. Shielded cable is not recommended.


1. NCC-2F card is installed in a PCI slot and is set for COM3 (XNET) or COM5 (HNET). 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
Chapter 2

2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's 10. Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak.
installation instructions. 11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit.
3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be 12. LPT2 has software key.
UL rated for fire (SIEMENS Models SCD-XP/XPWAN-B, SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT, SCD-17L-2, SCD-17LT-
13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter
2, SCD-19L-2, SCD-19LT-2, and PAL-1, respectively).
card takes on the identification of COM1.
4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL and XLS.
14. If you are using model SCD-XP/XPWAN-B, the touch screen controller card is not installed.
Installation

2-17
5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by
15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the
NCC-G software at the computer.
computer's CPU.
6. All circuits are power limited.
7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room.
Figure 2-11
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD-17/19LT-2 Connection Diagram -
Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations
Power Connection
Box
Approved Flexible
Conduit Connector
(user supplied) SCD-17LT-2/19LT-2

LCD Monitor
(rear view)

2-18
Approved 1/2” Flexible
Metallic/Nonmetallic See Notes 3 & 4
Power Cord Conduit (user supplied)
Plugs In To
Computer Bushing (user supplied)
12V 5A

AC Main Power VGA


120 VAC 60Hz Supply DC12V TOUCH VIDEO

PIN 1 - Fault Out


PIN 2 - Fault COM
Parallel Printer (rear view) TRI Installed in MXL
See Note 15

120 VAC/60 Hz
Keyboard & Mouse
Computer (rear view) (Using Splitter Cable)

1
See Notes 3 and 5 2
Power 3
Video

4
5
COM 1

Connection 6
7
Box required 5 5 8
LPT 1

for Desk Mount 4 4


Junction 3 3
Installations LAN 1
Box and Cover 2 2
LPT 2

COM 2

Approved Flexible 1 1
(user supplied)
Conduit Connector LAN 2
(user supplied)
USB
CPU

Flexible Conduit
PORT

CARD
CARD
CARD (For NCC Key)

COM 3

(User Supplied)
PORTS

PORTS

COM 5*
SERIAL

SOUND

NCC-2F

NCC-2F

Approved 1/2” Flexible


MONITOR

PARALLEL

Metallic/Nonmetallic
Conduit (user supplied) See NCC-2F Installation Instructions, P/N 315-049430
Junction
Box (Default COM Post Assignment Shown)
AC Main (user
supplied) * For NCCWAN Only
Bushing 120 VAC 60Hz
(user
supplied) Conduit

.
NOTES: 8. Shielded cable is not recommended.
1. NCC-2F card is installed in a PCI slot and is set for COM3 (XNET) or COM5 (HNET). 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's 10. Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak.
installation instructions. 11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit.
3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

12. LPT2 has software key.


UL rated for fire (SIEMENS Models SCD-XP/XPWAN-B, SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT, SCD-17L-2, SCD-17LT-
13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter
2, SCD-19L-2, SCD-19LT-2, and PAL-1, respectively).
card takes on the identification of COM1.
4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL and XLS.
14. If you are using model SCD-XP/XPWAN-B the touch screen controller card is not installed.
5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by
15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the
NCC-G software at the computer.
computer's CPU.
6. All circuits are power limited.
7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room.
Figure 2-12
SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD-17/19LT-2 Connection Diagram - Suitable For Desk Mount Installations
Monitor
(rear view)

Power 120 VAC


Connection 60 Hz
Box (not Touch SCD19TM
required for Port A Interface
Rack Mount See NCC-1F Installation Instructions
or Console Refer to page 8 and Note 1
Installations)
See Notes 3 and 4 PIN 1 - Fault Out
Parallel Printer (rear view) PIN 2 - Fault COM
TRI installed in MXL
See Note #15
120 VAC/60 Hz Centronics Parallel
Computer (rear view)

1
See Notes 3 and 5 2
3
4
5
VIDEO

6 6 6
7
5 8 5

4 4
Mouse

Junction
3 3
Box and Cover
2 2
LPT1

Approved Flexible
(user supplied) 1 1
Keyboard
LPT PORT 2

Conduit Connector
(For NCC Key)

Ethernet
(user supplied) Sound Elo Touch Screen
Flexible Conduit Card COM 2 Controller Card COM 1*
(User Supplied) See Note 14
Approved 1/2” Flexible
Metallic/Nonmetallic See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
Conduit (user supplied)
Junction The COM port on the Main
Box CPU must be disabled if
AC Main (user NCC-1F is being used.
Bushing 120 VAC 60Hz supplied) See Note 13
(user Conduit
supplied) *For NCCNTWAN only.

NOTES: 8. Shielded cable is not recommended.


1. NCC-1F card is installed in a 16-bit ISA slot and is set for COM2. 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
Chapter 2

2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's 10. Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak.
installation instructions. 11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit.
3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be 12. LPT2 has software key.
UL rated for fire (SIEMENS Models SCD550, SCD550T, SCD19M, SCD19TM, and PAL-1, respectively).
13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter
4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL. card takes on the identification of COM1. The NCC-1F card is identified as COM2.
5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by 14. If you are using model SCD-19M, the touch screen controller card is not installed.
Installation

2-19
NCC-G software at the computer.
15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the
6. All circuits are power limited. computer's CPU.
7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room.
Figure 2-13
SCD550-19TM Connection Diagram With NCC-1F - Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations
Power Connection
Box
Approved Flexible
Conduit Connector
(user supplied)
Monitor
(rear view)

2-20
Approved 1/2” Flexible
Metallic/Nonmetallic
Power Cord Conduit (user supplied)
Plugs In To 120 VAC
Computer Bushing (user supplied) 60 Hz
Touch SCD19TM or SCD21TM
Port A Interface
See NCC-1F Installation Instructions
Refer to page 8 and Note 1
See Notes 3 and 4 PIN 1 - Fault Out
Parallel Printer (rear view) PIN 2 - Fault COM
TRI installed in MXL
See Note #15
120 VAC/60 Hz Centronics Parallel
Computer (rear view)

1
See Notes 3 and 5 2
3
4
5
VIDEO

6 6 6
7
5 8 5

4 4
Mouse

Junction
3 3
Box and Cover
2 2
LPT1

Approved Flexible
(user supplied) 1 1
Keyboard
LPT PORT 2

Conduit Connector
(For NCC Key)

Ethernet
(user supplied) Sound Elo Touch Screen
Flexible Conduit Card COM 2 Controller Card COM 1*
(User Supplied) See Note 14
Approved 1/2” Flexible
Metallic/Nonmetallic See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
Conduit (user supplied)
Junction The COM port on the Main
Box CPU must be disabled if
AC Main (user NCC-1F is being used.
Bushing 120 VAC 60Hz supplied) See Note 13
(user Conduit
supplied) * For NCCNTWAN only.

NOTES: 7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room.
1. NCC-1F card is installed in a 16-bit ISA slot and is set for COM2. 8. Shielded cable is not recommended.
2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760.
installation instructions. 10. Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak.
3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit.


UL rated for fire (SIEMENS Models SCD550, SCD550T, SCD19M, SCD19TM, SCD21M, SCD21TM and
12. LPT2 has software key.
PAL-1, respectively).
13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter
4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL.
card takes on the identification of COM1. The NCC-1F card is identified as COM2.
5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by
14. If you are using model SCD-19M, the touch screen controller card is not installed.
NCC-G software at the computer.
15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the
6. All circuits are power limited.
computer's CPU.
Figure 2-14
SCD550-19TM /21TM Connection Diagram With NCC-1F - Suitable For Desk Mount Installations
Chapter 2 Installation

UPS Power Supply (For Application In U.S.A.)


If an Uninterruptible Power Supply is required for your system configuration, use
the ICS Lifeline Model 9300057 and wire it as shown in Figure 2-15.

NOTES:
1. All wires 14 AWG min, 600V insulation. 4. Standby Power requirements:
2. Wiring to the printer and NCC must be 14 AWG min, 120 VAC, 0.6A for 24 hours
600V insulation in conduit. 5. Standby Power requirements:
3. Use the UPS ICS Lifeline Model 9300057 (4 hour 120 VAC, 1.2A for 24 hours
standby) with standby generator.
For further information, contact ICS at 630-543-6200.

Figure 2-15
UPS Wiring Diagram

2-21
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Security Key Attachment


The security keys for NCCG systems are as follows:
NCC-1G: 1-16 nodes
NCC-2G: 1-32 nodes
NCC-3G: 1-48 nodes
NCC-4G: 1-64 nodes
NCC-5G: 1-128 nodes (Note: Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.)
NCC-6G: 1-256 nodes (Note: Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.)
NCC-16G: 16 node increment (See Installation Instructions P/N 315-096334)
NCC-GL: 1 node
NCC-GL1: Upgrade from a single node to a 16-network node system (See
Installation Instructions P/N 315-096334)

No Security Key Detected


The startup of the NCC system entails the use of a valid security key. If the key
driver SENTINEL.SYS is missing from the configuration file registry, or if the
driver cannot be located on the computer, the NCCG will enter a degraded mode
of operation. If the driver is present and loaded, then it is used to scan for any
keys that are attached. If no valid key (one with a CP signature) is found, then the
NCCG will again enter a degraded mode of operation, as shown in the following
screens.

Figure 2-16
NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Security Key Error Default Screens

Degrade Security Startup


The NCC is a part of a life safety system, and as such, the failure of a security
key should not prevent the system from performing those basic functions required
to preserve life and property. To this end, the NCCG will start up and monitor a
system even if the security key is missing; however, some features will not be
available and a reminder message will be periodically displayed.

2-22
Chapter 2 Installation

If the NCCG has never had a valid key connected to it, a dialog box will be
displayed at startup allowing the user to specify a general mode of operation (GL,
Text, Graphics). This value will not be saved in the NCCG’s initialization file,
therefore, on every restart the same question will be asked.
If the NCCG had been operating with a valid key and the software driver
(SENTINEL.SYS) is loaded, then the stored value for that key will be used to
configure the system. The user will be prompted five times that the key is missing
and then the NCCG will startup with limited editing ability and its reminder mes-
sage.
To allow for a “demo” mode of operation, the degraded condition of the NCCG
will vary slightly between the condition of a missing driver and a missing key. If
the driver is missing, then the general mode query box will always be displayed
on startup. In other words, a mode of operation (NCC-G or NCC-GL) can be
chosen, however some features will not be made available.

Security Key Feature Value


The NCCG will automatically accept a new key or key combination that offers
more features than the version previously installed (for example, upgrading from
an NCC-GL to NCC-G). If a key or key combination offering less features (for
example, going from NCC-G to NCC-GL) is detected, then a warning dialog is
displayed that asks the operator to accept or ignore the change, as shown in the
following screen.

Figure 2-17
Security Key Values Changed Screen

If accepted, then the capabilities of the NCCG are reduced to the new feature set.
If ignored, then the NCCG will resume using the previous package; however,
warning messages will be generated at 30 minute intervals.

2-23
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Software Installation
NCCG Software comes preinstalled in SBT, Inc. computer models SCD550 and
SCD550T. The first time the system is powered up, the following sequence
will run.

For Computers Using Windows XP™

To use the NCC-GL with MXL Systems prior to Rev. 10.0 and MXL-IQ Systems
prior to Rev. 6.0, begin with Step 1.
To use the NCC-GL with MXL Systems Rev. 10.0 or higher and MXL-IQ Systems
Rev. 6.0 or higher, begin with Step 5.
1. Create a network MXL System using the CSG-M.
2. Add the current MXL configuration to the XNET node map. It can be inserted
at any address, however it is advisable to use node address 1.
3. Add NCC-GL to the node map at address 2.
4. Edit the configuration for the MXL and add a NIM-1R/-1W at an available
module address.
NOTE: The NCC-GL will look like an NIM-1R/-1W to the MXL. You do
NOT install an actual NIM-1R/-1W card into the system.
All SBT, Inc. computers are preloaded with the NCCG software. Follow the
procedure in Step 5 to:
• re-install the software when necessary
• upgrade a system
• install the system on a computer that is not preconfigured from SBT, Inc.
5. Next, proceed with the software installation procedure outlined below.
• Install MS Windows XP Pro™ which includes Service Pack 2.
• Insert your NCCG software key into an available parallel port.
• Logon as administrator.
• Add the user name "firefinder" and password "firefinder":
- Navigate from the START button Start> Settings> Control Panel.
- Click on the User Accounts icon.
- Click on Create A New Account (refer to Figure 2-18).
- Type "firefinder" as the name for the new account.
- Click on the Next button.
- Select Computer Administrator (refer to Figure 2-19)
- Click on Create Account button.
- In the User Accounts window, click on the FireFinder icon.
- Select Create Password.

2-24
Chapter 2 Installation

- Fill in the following information:


Password = firefinder
Confirm Password - firefinder
- Click on Create Password.
• In a similar manner, add the user name "maintenance". This time, how-
ever, use a secret password. (Default - siemens)
• Exit the User Accounts window.

Figure 2-18
Create A New Account

Figure 2-19
Choose An Account Type

2-25
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

6. Open the Windows Control Panel by navigating from the START button.
Start > Control Panel, then click on Switch To Classic View on the left side of
the screen. (Note: If Switch To Classic View is not visible on the left side of
the screen, you are already in the classic view control panel window.)
• From the Windows Control Panel, select the Date/Time tool.
Check that the time, date and time zone settings are correct.

• From the Windows Control Panel, open the Printer tool and
add any additional printers required. Refer to the Windows XP™
manual for more information.
Note: No printer or printer spool can be connected to LPT1.
Doing so will prevent proper operation of the paper out
and printer off line function.
• From the Windows Control Panel, open the Display tool and
go to the Settings tab. Set the Desktop Area (screen resolution)
to a minimum of 1024x768 with a Color Quality as 16 bit or less.
Also, click the Advanced button and select Normal Size (96 DPI)
as the DPI setting in the General page.
The NCC will function properly with higher resolutions. If your monitor
can accept a higher Refresh frequency, set it to 75 Hz.
• If networking has been installed with XP, from the Windows
Control Panel, open Network Connections and click on the
Local Area Network icon. Click Properties in the general page.
Select Internet Protocol (TCPIP) and click Properties. Select
Use The Following IP Address. Enter the IP address: 192.168.1.1.
Enter the Mask 255.255.255.0. Press OK and exit the tool. (If you are
prompted about not having a WINS entry, ignore the message.)
• If you are using a touch screen, from the Windows Control
Panel, open the ELO Touchscreen tool and perform the
required screen calibration.

7. Close all windows and tools.

8. Initialize the Windows XP™ users that you have just created by logging on to
each one. Click Start> Log Off. When the logoff screen appears, click on the
Logoff Icon. Log on to "firefinder" by clicking on the FireFinder Icon, then log
on to "maintenance" and finally, log back on to "administrator".

9. Insert the NCC distribution CD into the CD ROM drive. The installation should
autostart. If it does not, find and run the file setup.exe in the root directory of
the CD. When prompted to continue, press ENTER.

2-26
Chapter 2 Installation

10. The installer program will start to install the following packages in this order:
Java Runtime Version 1.2.2
Sentinel Driver Version 7.4.0
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0
Microsoft IIS
NCC MP7
11. Java Runtime Version 1.2.2 - The following screen will appear (refer to Figure
2-20) to indicate the installation of the Java runtime package:

Figure 2-20
Java Runtime Opening Screen

Click on Yes to accept the licensing agreement. The next installation Screen
will appear (refer to Figure 2-21).

Figure 2-21
Java Runtime Installation Destination

2-27
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Click on Next to run the installation process. It is recommended not to change


the destination folder.

12. Sentinel Driver 7.4.0 - After the Java Runtime Environment installation is
completed, the Sentinel Driver Setup will start with the following screen (refer
to Figure 2-22).

Figure 2-22
Sentinel Driver Setup Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The License Agreement


screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-23). Select I accept the terms in the
license agreement, then click Next .

Figure 2-23
Sentinel Driver Licensing Agreement

The Setup Type screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-24). Select Custom,
then click Next.

2-28
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-24
Sentinel Driver Setup Type

The Custom Setup screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-25). Unselect
Sentinel Protection Server and Sentinel Keys Server. Click Next to run the
installation process.

Figure 2-25
Sentinel Driver Custom Setup

13. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 - Ater the Sentinel Driver installation is completed,
the Adobe Acrobat Reader installation will start with the following screen
(refer to Figure 2-26).

2-29
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-26
Adobe Acrobat Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The License Agreement


screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-27). Click Accept to accept the licensing
agreement.

Figure 2-27
Adobe Acrobat Licensing Agreement

The next installation Screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-28). Click on Next
to choose the default destination folder and run the installation process.

2-30
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-28
Adobe Acrobat Reader Installation Destination

14. Microsoft IIS - After the Acrobat Reader installation is completed, the
Microsoft IIS installation will start with the following screen (refer to Figure 2-
29).

Figure 2-29
Microsoft IIS Opening Screen

Remove the NCC CD from the CD-ROM drive and insert the Windows XP™
CD. Click OK. If the Microsoft Windows XP™ welcome screen appears, click
Exit to close the window (refer to Figure 2-30).

2-31
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-30
Microsoft Windows XP™ Welcome Screen

15. NCC MP7 - After the IIS installation is completed, the NCC installation will
start with the following screen (refer to Figure 2-31).

Figure 2-31
NCC MP7 Installation Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The Setup Type screen will
appear (refer to Figure 2-32).

2-32
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-32
NCC MP7 Setup Type

You have the option to select either Complete or Custom install. By default,
the NCC files will be installed in a folder named NCC2. If that destination is
acceptable, click Next. If you would like to install these files in a different
folder, select Custom install. Then, click Next. The following screen will
appear if you select a Custom setup (refer to Figure 2-33)

Figure 2-33
NCC MP7 Installation Destination

Click on Browse to choose a different destination folder, then click on Next.

2-33
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-34
NCC MP7 Current Settings List

The Current Settings list will show the components being installed as follows:
NCC-MP7
Click on Next. The installer will copy the files and the install will be completed
(refer to Figure 2-34).

16. Log off as user "firefinder" by clicking on Start> Log off firefinder.

17. Log in as "Administrator" again. Open up the User Accounts once again and
locate the firefinder user. (Refer to Step 5.)
• Double click on "firefinder" in the User Manager window.
• Click on the Group Membership button in the User Properties window.
• In the Group Memberships window select the Others radio button, then
select Users from the combo box.
• Click OK.
• Click OK again on the next window.
• Close the User Accounts.
• Reboot Windows XP™

2-34
Chapter 2 Installation

When the NCCG restarts, the NCC program will autorun and begin to prompt you
for your system configuration data as follows:

Figure 2-35
NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation and Setup Screens

• To proceed with the installation, press NEXT button.


• After the NEXT button is pressed, the following screen appears, as appli-
cable:

Figure 2-36
NCC-G and NCC-GL Node and Module Identification Screens

• The Use NIM Interface option is used with the NIM-1R to extend the
NCC-GL topography. The option allows the NCC-GL to be used on a
system with multiple nodes; however, the NCC-GL will only monitor and
control one node. In order for this option to operate, a NIM-1R card must
be installed in the node which the NCC-GL will be monitoring and control-
ling. The proper module and node number for the NIM-1R must agree with
the programming in the MMB for the NCC-GL module.
• Enter the Node Number assignment for the NCC-G/GL system and a Node
Button label. These values can be changed later in the system dialog box.
• If you do not complete this information, the following dialog box(es)
appears (as applicable) and you can not continue with the installation:

2-35
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-37
NCC-G/-GL and NCC-GL: MXL Unidentified Node Screens

• Once the node number assignment and label have been accepted, the
following screen appears:

Figure 2-38
NCC-G Installation and Setup

• Press the NEXT button to continue with basic system configuration. The
following screen appears:

Figure 2-39
NCC-G/GL Site Information
2-36
Chapter 2 Installation

• System Identification: Enter the name of the installed site, up to 52


characters long.
• Serial #: The number displayed is the version of the NCCG software.
• Command Seq #: The number displayed is the number of commands
executed since the system was installed.
• UL System: Select the NFPA 72 mode of operation. Refer to ther UL
System Type table at the end of this chapter for further information. The
possible selections are:
• NFPA 72 Local - Campus
• NFPA 72 Local - Highrise
• NFPA 72 Proprietary
NOTE: All NCCs on a network system need to be set to the same UL
system setting.
• Foreign Language Support: Uncheck "Enable Support".

• If System Identification is left blank, the following dialog box appears:

Figure 2-40
NCCG Missing Site Information

• After pressing the DONE button in the site information section, the follow-
ing screen appears, as applicable:

Figure 2-41
NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation Completion Screens

• If you want to review your entries, press the PREV button. Press FINISH if
you want to save your entries. This completes the XP installation. Con-
tinue on page 2-52 for printer installation.

2-37
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

For Computers Using Windows NT™

To use the NCC-GL with MXL Systems prior to Rev. 10.0 and MXL-IQ Systems
prior to Rev. 6.0, begin with Step 1.
To use the NCC-GL with MXL Systems Rev. 10.0 or higher and MXL-IQ Systems
Rev. 6.0 or higher, begin with Step 5.
1. Create a network MXL System using the CSG-M.
2. Add the current MXL configuration to the XNET node map. It can be inserted
at any address, however it is advisable to use node address 1.
3. Add NCC-GL to the node map at address 2.
4. Edit the configuration for the MXL and add a NIM-1R/-1W at an available
module address.
NOTE: The NCC-GL will look like an NIM-1R/-1W to the MXL. You do
NOT install an actual NIM-1R/-1W card into the system.
All SBT, Inc. computers are preloaded with the NCCG software. Follow the
procedure in Step 5 to:
• re-install the software when necessary
• upgrade a system
• install the system on a computer that is not preconfigured from SBT, Inc.
5. Next, proceed with the software installation procedure outlined below.
• Install MS Windows NT™ Version Workstation.
• Install MS Windows NT™ 4.00 Service pack 5 or greater.
• Insert your NCCG software key into an available parallel port.
• Logon as administrator (Note that a default installation of NT has a blank
password).
• Add a user named "firefinder" and password "firefinder":
- Navigate from the START button Start> Programs> Administrative
Tools> User Manager.
- From the User manager dialog, select the "User" menu item. In the
User menu select "New User". Refer to Figure 2-42.

2-38
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-42
Adding A New User From The User Manager Screen

• Fill in the following information in the User information window (refer to


Figure 2-43):
- Username = firefinder
- Description = FireFinder Default User
- Password = firefinder
- Confirm Password = firefinder
- Uncheck "User Must Change Password"
- Check "User Cannot Change Password"
- Check "Password Never Expires"
- Uncheck "Account Disabled"

Figure 2-43
New User Setup Window

2-39
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Click on the Groups button to bring up the group membership window.


Refer to Figure 2-44.

Figure 2-44
Group Memberships Window

Click on Administrators in the box on the right ("Not member of"), then
click Add. Make sure that Administrators has moved to the box on the left
("Member of"). If so, then click OK.
Click on Power Users in the box on the right ("Not member of"), then click
Add. Make sure that Power Users has moved to the box on the left
("Member of"). If so, then click OK.
• In a similar manner add a user named "maintenance". This time, however,
use a secret password. (Default = siemens)
• If you have not done so, change the administrator password to a secure,
secret one. (Default = siemens)
• Exit the User Manager window.

6. Open the Windows Control Panel by navigating from the START button.
Start> Settings> Control Panel.
• From the Windows Control Panel, select the Date/Time tool.
Check that the time, date and time zone settings are correct.
• From the Windows Control Panel, open the Printer tool and
add any additional printers required. Refer to the Windows NT™
manual for more information.
Note: No printer or printer spool can be connected to LPT1.
Doing so will prevent proper operation of the paper out
and printer off line function.
• From the Windows Control Panel, open the Display tool and
go to the Settings tab. Set the Desktop Area (screen resolution)
to a minimum of 1024x768 with a Color Palette of 32768 colors
(1677216 colors is preferable). Also, select the "Small Fonts" option.
The NCC will function properly with higher resolutions. If your monitor
can accept a higher Refresh frequency, set it to 75 Hz.

2-40
Chapter 2 Installation

• If networking has been installed with NT, from the Windows


Control Panel, open the Networking tool and go to the
Protocols tab. Select TCPIP and click Properties. Enter the
IP address 192.168.1.1. Enter the Mask 255.255.255.0.
Press OK and exit the tool. (If you are prompted about not
having a WINS entry, ignore the message.)
• If you are using a touch screen, from the Windows Control
Panel, open the ELO Touchscreen tool and perform the
required screen calibration.

7. Close all windows and tools.

8. Initialize the Windows NT™ users that you have just created by logging on to
each one. Click Start> Log Out Administrator. When the logon screen
appears, log on to "firefinder", then log on to "maintenance" and finally, log
back on to "administrator".

9. Insert the NCC-G distribution CD into the CD ROM drive. The installation
should autostart. If it does not, find and run the file setup.exe in the root
directory of the CD. When prompted to continue, press ENTER.

10. The installer program will start to install the following packages in this order:
Java Runtime Version 1.2.2
Sentinel Driver Version 7.4.0
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0
NCC MP7

11. Java Runtime Version 1.2.2 - The following screen will appear (refer to Figure
2-45) to indicate the installation of the Java runtime package:

Figure 2-45
Java Runtime Opening Screen
2-41
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Click on Yes to accept the licensing agreement. The next installation Screen
will appear (refer to Figure 2-46).

Figure 2-46
Java Runtime Installation Destination

Click on Next to run the installation process. It is recommended not to change


the destination folder.

12. Sentinel Driver 7.4.0 - After the Java Runtime Environment installation is
completed, the Sentinel Driver Setup will start with the following screen (refer
to Figure 2-47).

Figure 2-47
Sentinel Driver Setup Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The License Agreement


screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-48). Select I accept the terms in the
license agreement, then click Next .

2-42
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-48
Sentinel Driver Licensing Agreement

The Setup Type screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-49). Select Custom,
then click Next.

Figure 2-49
Sentinel Driver Setup Type

The Custom Setup screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-50). Unselect
Sentinel Protection Server and Sentinel Keys Server. Click Next to run the
installation process.

2-43
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-50
Sentinel Driver Custom Setup

13. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 - After the Sentinel Driver installation is
completed, the Adobe Acrobat Reader installation will start with the following
screen (refer to Figure 2-51).

Figure 2-51
Adobe Acrobat Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The License Agreement


screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-52). Click Accept to accept the licensing
agreement.

2-44
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-52
Adobe Acrobat Licensing Agreement

The next installation Screen will appear (refer to Figure 2-53). Click on Next
to choose the default destination folder and run the installation process.

Figure 2-53
Adobe Acrobat Reader Installation Destination

14. NCC MP7 - After the IIS installation is completed, the NCC installation will
start with the following screen (refer to Figure 2-54).

2-45
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-54
NCC MP7 Installation Opening Screen

Click on Next to continue the installation process. The Setup Type screen will
appear (refer to Figure 2-55).

Figure 2-55
NCC MP7 Setup Type

You have the option to select either Complete or Custom install. By default,
the NCC files will be installed in a folder named NCC2. If that destination is
acceptable, click Next. If you would like to install these files in a different
folder, select Custom install. Then, click Next. The following screen will
appear if you select a Custom setup (refer to Figure 2-56)
.

2-46
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-56
NCC MP7 Installation Destination

Click on Browse to choose a different destination folder, then click on Next.

Figure 2-57
NCC MP7 Current Settings List

The Current Settings list will show the components being installed as follows:
NCC-MP7
Click on Next (refer to Figure 2-57). The installer will copy the files and the
install will be completed.

2-47
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

If Windows NT™ Has Installed The Explorer Desktop


• Be sure to deactivate the welcome screen. On the task bar find and click
on a button labeled "Welcome: Microsoft Internet Explorer".
• Uncheck the selection "Show his next time you log in".
• Close the welcome window.

15. Log off as user "firefinder" by clicking on Start> Log off firefinder. (If you have
not installed Service Pack 5 you will need to press CTRL+ALT+DEL and
select Logoff from the pop up window.
Note: Hold down the Shift key while NT reloads - this will insure that the
logon window will appear.

16. Log in as "Administrator" again. Open up the User Manager once again and
locate the firefinder user. (Refer to Step 5.)
• Double click on "firefinder" in the User Manager window.
• Click on the Group button in the User Properties window.
• In the Group Memberships window select Administrators in the left box by
clicking on it.
• Click the Remove button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK again on the next window.
• Close the User Manager.
• Reboot Windows NT™
When the NCCG restarts, the NCC program will autorun and begin to prompt you
for your system configuration data as follows:

Figure 2-58
NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation and Setup Screens

• To proceed with the installation, press NEXT button.


• After the NEXT button is pressed, the following screen appears, as appli-
cable:

2-48
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-59
NCC-G and NCC-GL Node and Module Identification Screens

• The Use NIM Interface option is used with the NIM-1R to extend the
NCC-GL topography. The option allows the NCC-GL to be used on a
system with multiple nodes; however, the NCC-GL will only monitor and
control one node. In order for this option to operate, a NIM-1R card must
be installed in the node which the NCC-GL will be monitoring and control-
ling. The proper module and node number for the NIM-1R must agree with
the programming in the MMB for the NCC-GL module.
• Enter the Node Number assignment for the NCC-G/GL system and a Node
Button label. These values can be changed later in the system dialog box.
• If you do not complete this information, the following dialog box(es)
appears (as applicable) and you can not continue with the installation:

Figure 2-60
NCC-G/-GL and NCC-GL: MXL Unidentified Node Screens

• Once the node number assignment and label have been accepted, the
following screen appears:

2-49
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-61
NCC-G Installation and Setup

• Press the NEXT button to continue with basic system configuration. The
following screen appears:

Figure 2-62
NCC-G/GL Site Information

• System Identification: Enter the name of the installed site, up to 52


characters long.
• Serial #: The number displayed is the version of the NCCG software.
• Command Seq #: The number displayed is the number of commands
executed since the system was installed.
• UL System: Select the NFPA 72 mode of operation. Refer to ther UL
System Type table at the end of this chapter for further information. The
possible selections are:
• NFPA 72 Local - Campus
• NFPA 72 Local - Highrise
• NFPA 72 Proprietary
NOTE: All NCCs on a network system need to be set to the same UL
system setting.
• Foreign Language Support: Uncheck "Enable Support".

2-50
Chapter 2 Installation

• If System Identification is left blank, the following dialog box appears:

Figure 2-63
NCCG Missing Site Information

• After pressing the DONE button in the site information section, the follow-
ing screen appears, as applicable:

Figure 2-64
NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Installation Completion Screens

• If you want to review your entries, press the PREV button. Press FINISH if
you want to save your entries.

Exiting NCCG to the Windows NT™ Desktop for Printer Installation or


Other Maintenance Functions
NOTE: This function is only available to password level “D” or higher.
To exit the NCCG, press the ALT + F4 keys simultaneously. The following win-
dow pops up:

Figure 2-65
NCCG Command Center Close Window

Click on the OK button. The same window pops up a second time. Click on OK again.

2-51
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

As the computer is rebooting, the following screen will display briefly:

Figure 2-66
FireFinder Splash Screen

Quickly click on the Exit button to halt the NCCG start up process. When the
“STARTUP.BAT” window appears, you may do any one of the following:
• Press CTRL+C to exit the startup loop
• Go to the Start button and open a new command prompt
• Shutdown the system

This completes the NT™ installation section. Continue on to page 2-56 for printer
installation.

Printer Installation

For Computers Using Windows XP™

To install a printer on a computer that DOES NOT have NCCG preinstalled:


The logging printer must be installed using the Microsoft Windows® printer driver.
1. Click on Start and select Settings - Printers and Faxes.
2. Click on Add Printer and the Add Printer Wizard appears and asks how the
printer will be managed. Click on Next (refer to Figure 2-67).

2-52
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-67
Windows XP™ Add Printer Welcome Screen

3. Select Local printer attached to this computer, Unselect Automatically detect


and install my Plug and Play printer and click on Next (refer to Figure 2-68).

Figure 2-68
Windows XP™ Local or Network Printer

4. Select LPT1: as the port and click Next (refer to Figure 2-69).

2-53
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 2-69
Windows XP™ Printer Port Selection

5. Scroll down the Manufacturer's List and select Generic. Then select Generic/
Text Only in the Printers column (refer to Figure 2-70). Click on Next.

Figure 2-70
Windows XP™ Printer Software Selection

6. Select Yes for "Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this
printer as the default printer?" Click on Next.
7. Select Do not share this printer to indicate this printer will not be shared with
other network users (refer to Figure 2-71). Click on Next.

2-54
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-71
Windows XP™ Printer Sharing

8. Select Yes for "Would you like to print a test page?" (refer to Figure 2-72).
Click on Next.

Figure 2-72
Windows XP™ Printer Test Page

9. You will be asked to insert your Windows XP™ disk to complete the
installation. Close the Windows installation program if it automatically boots up.

10. Click on Finish.

2-55
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

For Computers Using Windows NT™

To install a printer on a computer that DOES NOT have NCCG preinstalled:


The logging printer must be installed using the Microsoft Windows® printer driver.
1. Click on Start and select Settings-Printers.
2. Click on Add Printer and the Add Printer Wizard appears and asks how the
printer will be managed.

Figure 2-73
Add Printer Wizard Screen

3. Select My Computer and click on Next.


4. Select LPT1: as the port, select Enable Printer Pooling and click on Next.

Figure 2-74
Enable Printer Spooling Screen

5. Scroll down the Manufacturer's List and select Generic. Then select Generic/
Text Only in the printers column.

2-56
Chapter 2 Installation

Figure 2-75
Printer Selection Screen

6. Select Yes for "Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this
printer as the default printer?"
7. Select Not Shared to indicate this printer will not be shared with other network
users.

Figure 2-76
Printer Not Shared Screen

8. Select Yes for "Would you like to print a test page?"

Figure 2-77
Printer Test Page Screen

9. You will be asked to insert your Windows NT™ disk to complete the
installation. Close the Windows installation program if it automatically boots up.

10. Click on Finish.

2-57
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

TO INSTALL THE LOGGING PRINTER IN THE NCC:


NOTE: If NCC is not installed, proceed to the software installation
instructions as described on page 2-30 (Windows XP™) or page
2-42 (Windows NT™) and install the NCC-G software before
proceeding with the next step. Password level "D" is required for
printer installation.
• From the NCC operator display, select (single click) the MORE button. In
the MORE COMMANDS dialog box which appears, select (single click)
the SETUP command. In the SETUP dialog box which appears, select
(single click) the SYSTEM button. In the notebook which appears select
the PRINTERS page by selecting (single clicking) the PRINTERS tab.
The following window appears:

Figure 2-78
Printers Setup Screen: Event Logging

• Select LPT1 for the event logging printer by clicking on the up or down
arrows until the field shows LPT1. Do the same for the Report Printer
unless another printer will be designated for lists and reports.
NOTE: If LPT1 is also used for the Report Printer, the Job Properties
option will be inactive.
NOTE: LPT1, the default event logging printer, must never have a print
manager assignment made against it or it will not print properly.
Print managers can be assigned for any other printer.
• Select (single click) DONE to exit out of each level of the command.

Printer Emphasis
NOTE: If printers other than the default printer provided are used, it is at
the owner's risk. Refer to the Windows XP™ or Windows NT 4.0™
printer installation instructions for further information.
The Printer Emphasis option enables the logging printer to print specific event
types (alarm, trouble, etc.) in color. This allows event types to stand out on a log

2-58
Chapter 2 Installation

report. Activate this option by clicking the Emphasis button on the printer set up
menu. The following screen will appear:

Figure 2-79
Printer Emphasis Settings Selector

Click on the Emphasis Printing Enabled box to activate this feature (confirmed by
a check appearing in the box).
All the control strings shown in the screen above are the defaults for the UL listed
logging printer (Model PAL-1) with a color kit installed. If you are using the PAL-1
with the color kit, there is no need to change these settings. If you are using a
printer model other than PAL-1, refer to the manual that accompanies the printer
to change the settings appropriately. Click the Save button to save the control
string information.
Then, click on the presets button and the following screen will appear:

Figure 2-80
Printer Emphasis Presets

From this window choose the printer type and click the Apply button.
NOTE: If you are using the PAL-1 printer (purchased from Siemens, Fire
Safety Division) choose the PAL-1 (Dot Matrix) model.

2-59
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To install a graphics output only printer (optional):


Follow the standard windows installation procedure to install a graphics output
only printer.

NCCG Graphic Printer Setup


After installing the graphics printer in Windows NT™, log on to the NCCG System
to set up the NCCG program to recognize the printer. (Note: Password Level D
is required for NCCG System Settings.)

• From the NCCG operator display, select (single click) the MORE button.
In the MORE COMMANDS dialog box which appears, select (single click)
the SETUP command. In the SETUP dialog box which appears, select
(single click) the SYSTEM button. In the notebook which appears select
the PRINTERS page by selecting (single clicking) the PRINTERS tab.
The following window appears:

Figure 2-81
Printers Setup Screen: Graphics Printer

• Select any installed Windows printer from the drop-down window in the
Graphics Event Printer field. Additional detail on the Graphics Event
Printer options can be found in Chapter 4.

2-60
Chapter 2 Installation

Template Placement
The NCCG packages are shipped with various keyboard templates as shown in
the table below. Refer to Figure 2-82 for the correct placement of templates on
the keyboard. Only three of the templates are required and the selection of
templates is based on the UL listed system types.
NOTE: Template #3 is not used with NFPA 72 Local - Campus.
If you are using a UL listed computer, Model Number SCD550 or SCD550T
(purchased from Siemens, Fire Safety Division), the keyboard templates are
shipped with the computer. These templates are reduced in size to fit on the
smaller keyboard.

2-61
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

1.

2.
3.

Figure 2-82
NCC-G/GL Template Placement

UL LISTED SYSTEM TYPE AND TEMPLATE SELECTION

Template Keyboard
Part Location
Configuration NCCG Operation Numbers (See Fig. 38)
The NCCG i s i n a moni tori ng mode ONLY. The 575-095009 1.
remote MXL/XLS node(s) are confi gured as 575-095009C 1.
standalone 72 Local - Campus panel(s). Local 575-093302 2.
NFPA 72 Local - control is through the MXL's MKB or XLSs PMI. The 575-093302C 2.
Campus NCCG di splays the current values of analog voltage,
sensi ti vi ti es, etc. The NCCG cannot di rectly
acknowledge, si lence, or reset a remote node.

The NCCG i s the pri mary control poi nt for an 575-095010 1.


MXL/XLS node or a collecti on of MXL/XLS nodes. It 575-095010C 1.
i s capable of block acknowledge, query, and control 575-093302 2.
NFPA 72 Local - of the system. The remote MXL/XLS node(s) are 575-093302C 2.
Highrise confi gured as 72 Local - Hi ghri se uni t(s) and may 575-093198 3.
contai n thei r own annunci ators (MKB/PMI). No local 575-093198C 3.
control i s possi ble at a remote MKB/PMI unless i ts
node i s out of communi cati on wi th the NCCG.

The NCCG i s the pri mary control poi nt for an 575-095011 1.


MXL/XLS node or a collecti on of MXL/XLS nodes. It 575-095011C 1.
i s capable of top event acknowledge, query, and 575-093302 2.
NFPA 72 control of the system. The remote MXL/XLS node(s) 575-093302C 2.
Proprietary are confi gured as 72 Propri etary uni t(s) and may 575-093198 3.
contai n thei r own annunci ators (MKB/PMI). Control 575-093198C 3.
i s possi ble from a remote locati on usi ng an
MKB/PMI that i s behi nd a locked door.

NOTE: Keyboard Templates with part numbers ending in "C" are reduced in size to fit on the Comark computer
keyboard. If you are converting from NCC OS/2 to NCCNT, all keyboard templates remain applicable.

IMPORTANT: For all configurations listed above, the NCC and all attached MXLs and
XLSs must have the same network settings or configuration troubles will occur.

2-62
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

3 Operator Display

Introduction
Once all MXL/XLS and WAIO node(s) are powered up, the NCCG displays global
system information as it occurs and allows the operator to enter commands to
control the system or view specific data within the system. The NCCG monitors
for the existence of all remote node(s) that were programmed into it using the
NETWORK command under the system SETUP menu. (See description of the
MORE button in Chapter 4.) It also announces its existence at the node address
that was entered at configuration time.

The operator display on the main screen has six regions as shown in Figure 3-1
and Figure 3-2. They are the Status Line, Browser Window, Graphics Window,
Event Window, Button Array, System Node Status Bar.

GRAPHICS BUTTON
WINDOW ARRAY

STATUS
LINE

BROWSER
WINDOW

EVENT
WINDOW

SYSTEM
NODE
STATUS
BAR

Figure 3-1
NCC Graphics Main Screen

3-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

GRAPHICS BUTTON
WINDOW ARRAY

STATUS
LINE

BROWSER
WINDOW

EVENT
WINDOW
SYSTEM
NODE
STATUS
BAR
Figure 3-2
NCC-GL Main Screen

System Status Line


This area displays the status of the MXL/XLS system and NCCG, including:
ALR=x Indicates the number of active alarms
SUP=x Indicates the number of active supervisories
SEC=x Indicates the number of active security alarms
STA=x Indicates the number of status conditions (display is optional,
see Chapter 4 - System Settings: Display Tab and Device Edit:
Options)
TRB=x Indicates the number of trouble conditions
ACK=x Indicates the number of acknowledgments pending
<system status message> (located within “< >”) This message normally
displays <System Normal>. The table below lists system status messages
in descending display priority. If a condition of higher priority occurs, its
respective message replaces the one that is currently displayed. The lowest
ranked message is <System Normal> and displays only if no other condi-
tion exists. (Refer to System Status Messages Table.)
L=x Indicates the password level of the current operator, where x is
either level A through D or an asterisk (*) for the locked system level.
Time and Date Indicates the current time and date. The seconds display
is manipulated by direct program control. This gives the operator a direct
indication that the monitoring program is functioning.
3-2
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES

Printer Fail Pri nter i s di sconnected, turned off, or out of paper.

Network Fail The NCC-G cannot make contact wi th any remote node.

There are one or more alarms pendi ng acknowledgment outsi de the event
ALR Pending
li st wi ndow.

There are one or more supervi sori es pendi ng acknowledgment outsi de


SUP Pending
the event li st wi ndow.

There are one or more status poi nts pendi ng acknowledgment outsi de the
STA Pending
event li st wi ndow.

There are one or more troubles pendi ng acknowledgment outsi de the


TRB Pending
event li st wi ndow.

There are one or more securi ti es pendi ng acknowledgment outsi de the


SEC Pending
event li st wi ndow.

Disarmed Devices One or more nodes, modules, or detectors i s di sarmed i n the system.

Some off-normal condi ti on whi ch does not meet one of the above speci al
< blank line >
cases.

System i s polli ng. All nodes are connected. No nodes or detectors are
System Normal
di sarmed. Pri nter i s connected and on-li ne.

The Browser Window


This area displays a tree list of either all images in the database or all devices in
the database. It has two views, Device View and Image View.
• Image View - When you click on an image name, the Browser Pane (the
bottom half of the Graphics Window) displays the image with the first
assigned device (Refer to Figure 3-3, Browser Image View - SIngle
Device). To show all devices, right click on the image name and a menu
item, "Show All Devices" appears. Select and click on this item to bring up
all the devices on the image (Refer to Figure 3-4, Browser Image View -
All Devices.)
If the image has devices assigned to it, a "+" appears to the left of the
image name. Click on the "+" to expand the tree and display all devices
assigned to this image. Click on one of the devices to display only that
device in the browser pane.
NOTE: When you are in the Image View, the "Device View" button displays.

3-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 3-3
Browser Image View - Single Device

Figure 3-4
Browser Image View - All Devices

• Device View - At first, the Device View shows the nodes in the database.
When you click on a node, if it is expandable, a "+" appears to the left of
the node name. Click the "+" to expand the tree and display all of the
modules assigned to this node. If the module is expandable, a "+" will
appear to the left of the module name. Click on the "+" to expand the tree
and display all of the devices assigned to this module.

3-4
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

When you click on a device, the browser pane shows a thumbnail view of all
images assigned for all zoom levels to that device (refer to Figure 3-5, Device
view With Thumbnail Images). When you select a thumbnail view, the image for
that level will fill the browser pane and the device appears on that image (refer to
Figure 3-6, Device View With Image Selected).
The Device View uses node configuration data to show devices. XL3 nodes do
not contain configuration data and will not appear in this view. Changes in con-
figuration data require a restart of the NCC to be reflected in browser views.
NOTE: When you are in the Device View, the "Image View" button displays.

Figure 3-5
Device View With Thumbnail Images

Figure 3-6
Device View With Image Selected
3-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To switch between the two views, click on either the "Device View" button to display
the device view tree or the "Image View" button to display the image view tree.
NOTE: To display the Browser Window and Pane, you must select
"Enable Graphics Browser" in the System Settings> Display Tab
(refer to Chapter 4).
Once the graphics browser is enabled, use the "Browse On" and "Browse Off"
buttons in the More commands window to hide or show the Browser Window
and Pane.

The Graphics Window


This area displays a graphic or map associated with the selected event. An
appropriate icon flashes to show the exact location and type of event. The user
can scroll the graphic image to view other areas or reduce the system event
window to reveal more of the displayed graphic.
NOTE: If the event currently selected does not have a set of graphic
images associated with it, the “NO IMAGE FOR THIS EVENT”
banner displays.

The Event Window


The event window is located below the graphics window. All system events
(alarms, troubles, etc.) are listed in this window in chronological order by event
type. A leading ICON is marked with a check mark when the event is acknowl-
edged. See Figure 3-9 for Event Icon Descriptions. The information in this window
can be scrolled up or down to view items that are outside the current view. The
event window can also be resized to allow for a greater number of events to be
displayed.
The message format is shown below:

EVENT EVENT ACK STANDARD DEVICE NAME


TYPE STATE PLACE (NODE:MODULE:DEVICE)

TIME CUSTOM
DATE
MESSAGE

Figure 3-7
Event Window Format

3-6
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

• EVENT TYPE
ALARM - displayed in red
SUPERVISORY - displayed in blue
SECURITY - displayed in magenta
TROUBLE - displayed in yellow
STATUS - displayed in light blue
• EVENT STATE - either IN or OUT
• PLACE WHERE EVENT WAS ACKNOWLEDGED
LC - local (i.e., at the NCC-G)
RM - remote (at the MXL panel)
L? - acknowledged locally, but message could not be delivered to the
remote panel because of a line break, etc.
• STANDARD DEVICE NAME
MXL - NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER: DEVICE NUMBER

XLS - The XLS format will be one of the following:


NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER
NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER^COMPONENT

NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER.SUBMODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER


WAIO - NODE NUMBER:WAIO MODULE NUMBER-WAIO DEVICE NUMBER
• DATE - day:month:year
• TIME - hour (24 hour format):minute:second
• CUSTOM MESSAGE - The custom message is either the default as-
signed in the CSG-M (Custom Software Generator for MXL) or one
assigned at the NCCG. The NCCG assigned message will override a
custom message assigned in the CSG-M. The new custom message is
displayed in the NCCG event window.

THE EVENT WINDOW WITH DISPLAY NODE NAME OPTION


When the Display Node Name option is turned on, the Event Window has a
different format to make room for the node name (refer to Figure 3-8).
EVENT NODE CUSTOM
TYPE NAME MESSAGE

EVENT STANDARD DEVICE NAME DATE & TROUBLE TYPE


STATE (NODE:MODULE:DEVICE) TIME (TROUBLES ONLY)

Figure 3-8
Event Window Format - Display Node Name Option
3-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The event type text is abbreviated in this format and displays as follows:
• EVENT TYPE
ALR - displayed in red
SUP - displayed in blue
SEC - displayed in magenta
TRB - displayed in yellow
STA - displayed in light blue

Special Cases (Does Not Apply to NCC-GL)


See Appendix E for examples and information.

ALARM SECURITY

ALARM SECURITY
ACK’D ACK’D

ALARM SECURITY
OUT OUT

ALARM SECURITY
OUT OUT
ACK’D ACK’D

SUPERVISORY TROUBLE

SUPERVISORY TROUBLE
ACK’D ACK’D

SUPERVISORY TROUBLE
OUT OUT

SUPERVISORY TROUBLE
OUT OUT
ACK’D ACK’D

STATUS STATUS
OUT

STATUS STATUS
ACK'D OUT
ACK'D

Figure 3-9
Event Icon Descriptions
3-8
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

System Node Status Bar


A node is one fire alarm control panel represented by a network address. For
more information refer to Chapter 4, Basic Configuration - Network.
This status bar at the bottom of the screen is used to indicate the general state of
node(s) attached to the NCCG. Each rectangular icon represents a node or group
of nodes and changes color and text to indicate normal (green), alarm (red),
supervisory (blue), security (magenta), status (light blue), or trouble (yellow)
activations.
The color and text state also reflects the synchronization process with the MXL/
XLS network. Upon initialization, the node box appears yellow with an “X” through
it. When the NCC begins to hear the heartbeat of the MMB/PMI, the node box
turns an olive color and the “X” is removed. At this point, the NCC only hears the
MMB/PMI and synchronization has not begun. Once the NCC begins to commu-
nicate back to the MMB/PMI, the node box turns to a cyan (greenish blue) color.
Synchronization has begun. The nodes will turn cyan in the order that the MMB's/
PMI's heartbeat is heard by the NCC.
Once synchronization has begun, the NCC will begin to download the CSG-M of
each MXL panel. If the CSG-M has been changed since the last download, the
node box will appear in a bright green color with a percentage sign. The percent-
age sign provides benchmarks on the process of the CSG-M download. Upon
successful completion of the CSG-M download, the node box will turn back to
cyan, then to the color of the state of the MXL (for example, green for normal; red
for alarm).
If there is more than one NCC on the network, only the lowest address NCC will
download the CSGM out of the MXL panels. Other network NCCs must have their
CSGM files manually imported using the MORE> SETUP CSG/Zeus Import
command.
If you always want to manually import all CSGM files, check "Inhibit Automatic
Configuration Download" in the MORE> SYSTEM SETTINGS> OPTIONS tab.
(refer to Chapter 4, System Settings Window - Options Tab). NCCWAN systems
must manually import MXL CSGM configurations for all nodes that are connected
by HUB-4s.
NOTE: The CSG-M does not contain configuration information for XLS nodes.
You must manually copy the ZEUS.xml file and import it. (The file name is limited
to 8 characters.)
If the synchronization is not successful, the node button will remain in the cyan
color. If more than one node button is cyan for more than five seconds, there may
be a network communications problem.
Clicking on a particular button pops up a dialog box providing further information
about the Node and enables the operator to CONNECT, DISCONNECT, RESET
or SHOW the node as shown in the figure below (refer to Chapter 5, System
Node Status Bar - Dialog Box). Each node button is push on/push off. Additional
buttons display on a multiple NCC system to either REQUEST control or MONITOR
a node using the Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control (refer to Chapter 5,
Command Request Dialog Box).
3-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 3-10
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box

The DISCONNECT and CONNECT buttons appear only for XNET network
connected nodes. For nodes connected through a HUB-4, the dialog box will
appear as in the figure below. For more information, refer to Chapter 5, Display-
ing Event Information - By Node.

Figure 3-11
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box
HUB-4 Connected Node

The appearance and operation of WAIO system nodes is described on page 5-24.
Upon initialization, a WAIO system node will appear yellow with an "X" through it.
When the NCC hears from the WAIOs, it will update the individual WAIO node
modules and the WAIO system node. No synchronization process occurs for
WAIOs as the initial communications contains all needed WAIO data. Configura-
tions for WAIOs are kept at the NCC and not out at the WAIO. Therefore, con-
figuration downloads do not occur for WAIO nodes or modules.

The Button Array


The various buttons to the right of the graphics and event windows are used to
control the system and are activated using either a touch screen or a mouse. The
buttons visible on the main screen are ACK, SILENCE, RESET, ZOOM IN,
ZOOM OUT, NEXT, PREV, LOG ON, SHOW, USER and MORE. Each of these
functions can also be accessed using function keys listed next to the button
array. For more information about these functions, refer to the CONFIGURATION
and OPERATION sections of this manual.

3-10
CHAPTER 3 Operator Display

or ’
or “
or œ
or ”
or •
or –
or —
or ›
or ˜
or ™
or ¨+”

Figure 3-12
The Button Array

Control Point Window


To Arm and Disarm or add a comment, either:
• Click on the icon on an event in the event display, or
• Click on a device on a graphic
A Control Point Window appears with the custom message as the text.

Figure 3-13
Control Point Window For A Device
3-11
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

In the Control Point Window, a device's input or output can be disarmed or armed
using the Disable and Enable buttons. Enter a comment in the "Enter Optional
Comment" area. This information will be recorded on the printer and in the history
log when the user closes the window by pressing the End/Comment button. To
enter new comments, open a new Control Point Window. The Select buttons are
only active for an XLS, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 3-14
Control Point Window - XLS Device With Components

Click on the Select button in the Input Control section to display the Input Compo-
nents Control window, shown in the figure below. Select the input components
that you want disarmed/armed by checking the appropriate check box(s) and
click either the Disable or Enable button. Likewise, click on the Select button in
the Output Control section to disply the Output Components Control window.
Select the output components that you want disarmed/armed by checking the
appropriate check box(s) and click either the Disable or Enable button.

Figure 3-15
Input Components Control Window
Figure 3-16
Output Components Control Window

3-12
Chapter 4 Configuration

4 Configuration

Basic Configuration - System


NOTE: Full system configuration features can only be accessed by
password level D. Refer to the following sections of this manual for
further information:
• Operator Logon Names and Passwords, page 4-13
• Setup - Logon Tab, pages 4-13 – 4-17

Off-Line System Configuration


Use this procedure to "disconnect" the NCC from the network (the NCC will not
have control of the system). This is helpful when adding or editing system con-
figurations, including custom device messages, graphics and icons.
Press ¦+” to close the NCC and go to the Windows desktop. Go to the
MS DOS Command Prompt either by double clicking on the Command Prompt
icon or clicking on Start > Programs > Command prompt. From C:\ type in
cd\ncc2 and press ENTER. The prompt should now read C:\ncc2\. Now type
nccwn<space>/bypass. Note that <space> represents pressing the Spacebar
once. The command line on the screen should appear as follows:
C:\ncc2>nccwn/bypass
To exit the Off-Line Mode once you have completed the configuration, log off and
restart the computer. The NCC will automatically start to run in "normal" mode.

4-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To begin system configuration:


 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys. The following window pops up:

 From the More Commands


window, click
on the Setup button, or

 Press the ¦ + S
keys.

Figure 4-1
More Commands Window
The following window pops up:

 From the Setup window,


click on the System button, or

 Press the ¦ + S
keys.

Figure 4-2
Setup Window

4-2
Chapter 4 Configuration

The Title window displays as follows:

Figure 4-3
NCCG System Settings Window - Title Tab

Title Tab
The Title window was configured during the initial installation. At this point, the
following information can now be changed:
• System Identification: Enter the name of the installed site, up to 52
characters long.
• Serial #: The number displayed before the dash is the version of the
NCCG software. The number displayed after the dash is the software key
serial number.
• Command Seq #: The number displayed is the number of commands
executed since the system was installed.
• UL System: Select the NFPA 72 mode of operation. Refer to the UL
Listed System Type Table, page 2-62, for further information. The pos-
sible selections are:
• NFPA 72 Local - Campus
• NFPA 72 Local - Highrise
• NFPA 72 Proprietary
• Foreign Country Support:
• Uncheck "Enable Support".

4-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Next,  click on the Options tab, or  press the ´ key.


The Options window displays as follows:

Figure 4-4
System Settings Window - Options Tab with Password Tab

Figure 4-5
System Settings Window - Options Tab with Logon Tab

Options Tab
From the System Settings window, at the Options tab, configure the following:
• Reset Authorization Level: Password level that allows the user to reset
the NCC. NOTE: The password level to reset a node is set in the Logon -
Security level screen, not here.
4-4
Chapter 4 Configuration

• Node Control Authorization Level: Password level that allows the user
to connect and/or disconnect a node.
• Temporary Disable Time in Minutes: Choose the number of minutes
(from 1 to 720) that a device or node, disabled by a B level operator,
remains disabled. After the allotted time, the device or node automatically
reconnects.
• Default Archive Disk Drive: The default disk drive letter used for an
archive of history. This is initially set for the A or floppy drive. It can be set
to the CD writer drive if more storage space is desired.
• Operator Logon Names and Passwords: If selected, this option en-
ables the use of individual operator IDs and passwords. If not selected,
only the simple system passwords by level can be used.
If this option is not activated, the Passwords tab will display, as shown in
Figure 4-4. If this option is activated, the Logon tab will display, as shown
in Figure 4-5. Refer to the Logons and Password tabs on pages 4-13 – 4-17
for more information.
• History Logging and Reporting: If selected, this option enables the
system to store, retrieve, and report long term event history.
• Time Controlled Events: If selected, this option enables the time events
to be edited and used in the system.
• Logging Printer Connected: If selected, this option enables the local
system printer.
• Expand Macro Command Logging: When this option box is checked,
the progress of a macro command is logged on the system printer as each
subcommand is activated. The default setting for this parameter if OFF.
• Inhibit Automatic Configuration Download: When this option box is
checked, it inhibits the automatic download of the configuration informa-
tion from the remote MMBs.
• Inhibit Generation of Out Events: If selected, the out messages after
reset will not appear and will not require acknowledgment. The default
setting is OFF.
• Sound System Enabled: Select this option to enable the sound features
(refer to page 4-73). Default = unchecked or not enabled. Note: this option
will only be available if the proper hardware for sound is installed.
• Custom Device Names: If selected, this option enables the use of
custom device names or pseudonyms for the conventional node:module-
device format. For example, if device 4:7-5 is a zone in the main lobby, it
can be given the custom name “Lobby-1”.
• Use Touch Keyboard for Input: If selected, this option automatically
pops up the touch keyboard for screens that require input as shown in
Figure 4-6.
• Hide Configuration Error Event: When this option box is checked, a
change in a panel's configuration that results in it differing from the con-
figuration imported into the NCC is not annunciated as an event.

4-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Hide Nim Error Retry Message: When this option box is checked, it
inhibits XNET communication retry errors from popping up on the screen
in an error message window.

Figure 4-6
Touch Screen Keyboard

Next,  click on the More tab, or


 press the ´ key.
The More window appears as follows:

Figure 4-7
System Settings Window - More Tab

4-6
Chapter 4 Configuration

More Tab
From the NCCG System Settings window, at the More tab, configure the
following:
• Automatic Logout: If selected, this will automatically logout an operator
after a preset duration of no operator input. This preset time can be set by
minutes in the Automatic Logout time section.
• Inhibit Multiple Reset Filter: If selected, this option inhibits the filter
which prevents panel resets at less than 2.5 minute intervals. The default
is OFF (recommended).
• Enable XNET: When this option is checked, the XNET communications
port is active. Default = checked or enabled. If no panels or other NCCs
are connected on XNET (as in an NCCWAN system), this option should
be unchecked. Note: If the state of this option is changed, the NCC should
be restarted.
• Style 7 Supervision: Select this option to enable/disable Style 7 supervi-
sion for XNET network.
• Enable HNET: When this option is checked, the HNET communications
port is active. Default = unchecked or disabled. If any WAN Components
are installed on the system (refer to the Setup Network section) such as
HUB-4, NIC-C, PSC-12, etc., this option should be checked or enabled.
Note: If the state of this option is changed, the NCC should be restarted.
Multiple NCC Configuration Options
• Control Vectoring: When this option is checked, WAN features, such as
node grouping, the use of the request, grant, deny feature to move control
between NCCs, and the connection of panels using HUB-4s is enabled.
• TCP/IP used for NCC link: When this option is checked, NCC to NCC
communications will go through the Ethernet NIC card in the PC using
TCP/IP. This option also enables the TCP/IP address entry in the Setup
Network map for NCCs.
• Inhibit automatic data base exchange: When this option is checked,
any changes in one NCC will not be reflected in any other NCC. The data
base must be manually updated or transferred using Save and Load of
the data base at all NCCs individually. Note: Because the automatic data
base exchange feature does not exist at this time, this option should be
enabled or checked.

4-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Next,  click on the Display tab, or  press the ´ key.


The Display window appears as follows:

Figure 4-8
System Settings Window - Display Tab

Display Tab
From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Display tab, configure the
following:
• Newest Event At Top Of List: If selected, the event window displays the
most recent acknowledged event at the top of the list. If not selected, new
acknowledged events are listed at the bottom of the list. The default
setting is OFF.
• Print Multi-line Custom Messages: If selected, this option allows
custom messages to display multiple lines. The default setting is OFF.
• Enable Graphics Display: When this option is not selected, the graphics
window will be closed and covered by the Event List Window. The default
setting is ON.
• Enable Graphics Browser: If selected, this option allows the browser
window to be displayed at the left hand side of the graphics window.
• Display Multi-line Custom Messages: This option allows a long custom
message to display as much as possible in the event window.
• Display Status Events: If selected, this option allows status events to be
displayed in the event window.
• Display Node Name: When this option is checked, the event display will
change to allow the display of the node name. Refer to Chapter 3 Opera-
tor Display showing the Event Window with the Display Node Name
Option on.

4-8
Chapter 4 Configuration

• Icon Refresh Limit: This option allows a specified number of icons to be


displayed in addition to an activated icon. The default setting for the
number of icons to display is 20; the maximum is 100.
• Maximum Number Of Lines: If Enable Multiple Display Lines is se-
lected, choose the number of lines to display by clicking on the up and
down arrows. A sample display illustrates each of the choices, from one to
four lines. The default setting is 1.

Next,  click on the Printers tab, or  press the ´ key. The Printers
window displays as follows:

Figure 4-9
System Settings Window - Printers Tab

Printers Tab
NOTE: For printer installation instructions, refer to pages 2-52 to 2-57.
From the NCC System Settings window, at the Printers tab, configure the
following:
• Event Logging Printer: Select the printer port for the event logging
printer by clicking on the up and down arrows.
• Choose the maximum number of columns on the printer.
• Check Inhibit periodic printer out of paper test if you want the printer to
be unsupervised.
• Emphasis: Press this button to set up color line printing for the Event
Logging Printer. (For detailed setup information, refer to pages 2-58 - 2-59.)
• Graphics Event Printer: Select one of the default printers from the drop
down list. Then click to activate any of the following options:
• Automatic Print on Alarm: If selected, this option will allow an auto-
matic graphic printout on an alarm event.

4-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Auto Print on Supervisory: If selected, this option will allow an


automatic graphic printout on a supervisory event.
• Auto Print on Security: If selected, this option will allow an automatic
graphic printout on a security event.
• No Print Borders: This option disables the border around a graphics
printout which speeds up ink jet printers.
• Negative Base Image: If selected, the image will print inverted or
negative (black/white reversed).
• Fit To Page: If selected, this option automatically scales the graphic to
fit on the selected page size.
• Report Printer: Select one of the default printers from the drop down list.
• Choose the maximum number of columns on the printer.
• Check Enable Independent Report Printer Only to print all reports on a
separate reports only printer.
• Job Properties: If the same LPT port is used for both the logging and
report printers, this option will appear grayed out. If this is not the case,
the job properties will be activated allowing for the print job settings to be
established.

Using the Graphics Printer


The More Commands window contains a Print button, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Select this button at any time to print the full graphic for the event shown. This
must be followed if none of the automatic print options are activated. Each printed
graphic will have the same zoom level and icon placement as those currently
showing on the screen. Printing is spooled to the hard disk so that multiple prints
can be queued up, assuming there is sufficient hard disk space.
When the Print button is activated, a message box appears that indicates Print-
ing in Progress. This box stays on the screen until the image is queued up for
the printer spooler. If there is any problem, such as printer off-line, out of paper,
wrong port assigned, etc., error message boxes appear. The More Commands
window disappears after the Print button is pressed.

Graphics Print Format (Refer to Figure 4-10.)


The format of the graphics printout is as follows:
• The current bitmap with all icons showing on the screen is centered and
scaled to fit the printer size to the maximum without distorting the image.
• The title, NCCG Printout, or the NCCG’s system name appears in the
upper right with the current time and date the print was made. Note that
this is the print time and not the event time.
• Below the image is the event information. This information is the same as
the event showing (or selected) on the screen to confirm that the graphic
printed is for the right event.
• The event type (ALARM, TROUBLE, etc.), IN/OUT state, LC/RM
acknowledge, the address (node: module-device) appear on line 1.
4-10
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-10
Sample Graphic Printout
(Shown in Portrait Mode)

• The event’s time and date appear on line 2. A custom message ap-
pears at the end of this line if it is less than 40 characters in length. If it
is greater than 40 characters, it appears on the following lines.
• The full length message to a maximum of 512 characters appears
assuming there is sufficient room available below the graphic.
• The full page printing area is enclosed in a rectangle unless the No
Print Borders option is set.

4-11
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Next,  click on the Set Time tab, or


 press the ´ key.
The Set Time window displays as follows:

Figure 4-11
NCCG System Settings Window - Set Time Tab

Set Time Tab


From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Set Time tab, configure the
time and date for the whole system by clicking on the up and down arrows.
• Current - Press this button to update the displayed date and time on the
NCCG only to the current date and time.
Note: This is a global command. When the Set button is clicked, all
MXLs receive the new time and date at the same time, and their
internal clocks are all updated.
Solar Events
If any timed events in your system use the Daily Solar activation mode, you must
provide special geographical clock and calendar information needed to predict
the sun’s altitude angle. The Location section of this window is for the latitude
and longitude of the installation, in degrees and minutes of arc.
Solar events can be timed quite accurately (within one to two minutes) if you
specify the installation coordinates to within a few minutes of arc. This information
can usually be obtained from a good atlas. See Appendix B for a list of the latitude
and longitude for selected cities.

4-12
Chapter 4 Configuration

If the Operator Logon Names and Passwords option has been selected at the

Options tab,  click on the Logon tab, or  press the ´ key.


The Logons window displays as follows:

Figure 4-12
NCCG System Settings Window - Logon Tab

Logon Tab
From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Logon tab,

 click on the New button to add a user / highlight an existing user and
click on the Edit button to modify the information, or

 press the ¦ + N keys to add a user / highlight an existing


user and press the ¦ + E keys to modify the information.
The Edit a User Logon window displays as follows:

Figure 4-13
Edit a User Logon Window 4-13
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Note: The system administrator (logged in at password level D) is the


only person who can add or delete a name-password combination
or modify the password level.
From the Edit a User Logon window, add/modify a user logon and password:
• Logon: Type a unique identification for the user, between 1 and 15
characters in length, using any combination of uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters or symbols on the keyboard. No spaces are
allowed.
• Password: Choose a password that is not obvious to another person. A
password may be from 4 to 10 characters in length, using any combina-
tion of uppercase or lowercase alphanumeric characters or symbols on
the keyboard.
Note: Your password is case-sensitive; you must enter it exactly as
originally typed, including uppercase and lowercase characters.
• Full Name: Type the full name of the user. This information appears on
user reports.
• Misc. Information: Type any additional information, up to 32 characters
in length (optional). This information appears on user reports.
• Access Level: When the NCCG operates with the simple password
system or the system with user ID and password, there are six access
levels. Each higher level can access the functions of the level below it.
Some functions can be accessed with no password entered.

 click on the Update button to save changes / click on the Cancel


button to leave the Edit a User Logon window without saving changes, or

 press the ¦ + U keys to save changes / press the ¦ + C


keys to leave the Edit a User Logon window without saving changes.

To delete a user logon ID and password,

 highlight an existing user and click on the Delete button, or


 highlight an existing user and press the ¦ + D keys.
Note: It is possible to delete or modify your own password so that you
lose access to the “D” password level. If this occurs, call Siemens
Building Technologies, Inc. Technical Support at 1-800-248-7976.
If the Operator Logon Names and Passwords option has not been selected at the
Options tab,

 click on the Passwords tab, or  press the ´ key.


4-14
Chapter 4 Configuration

The Passwords window displays as follows:

Figure 4-14
NCCG System Settings Window - Passwords Tab

Enter a Simple System Password for each level, choosing passwords that are not
obvious to others. A password may be up to 6 characters in length, using any
combination of uppercase or lowercase alphanumeric characters or symbols on
the keyboard. Note: Passwords are case-sensitive; you must enter them exactly
as originally typed, including uppercase and lowercase characters.
The commands that each security level can access are programmable in the
Security level Tab. Click the Security Level Tab to bring up the following window:

Figure 4-15
Security Levels Windows - Upper View

4-15
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Use the scroll bar to scroll down to the lower view of the Security Levels Window:

Figure 4-16
Security Levels Windows - Lower View

Six security levels are provided for all commands. Level * is the locked console
level; Level E is a maintenance level that is only used by factory authorized
personnel. Choose the lowest level that should have access to each command
by checking the box in front of the appropriate letter. This activates access for
the chosen security level and automatically activates all higher levels as well. For
example, checking on level A for a command will activate levels A, B, C and D
for that command, too.
The commands on the list are detailed in Chapter 6 - manual operation. The
exceptions are as follows;
• CONTROL - refers to transfer of control from NCC to NCC
• FULL CONTROL - refers to transferring full control of all nodes from
NCC to NCC
• LIST - lists on the printer
• LOG - logs a single line on the printer
• MONITOR - refers to turning on and off monitoring of a node
• REBUILD - allows rebuilding of databases
• TEST - allows entry of test devices

 click on the Save button to record any changes in security level and
exit to the Setup window, or  press the ¦ + S keys to save
changes and exit to the Setup window. Note: The Done command exits to
the Setup window without saving any system setting changes.

4-16
Chapter 4 Configuration

When all system setting edits are completed,

 click on the Save button to save changes and exit to the Setup
window, or  press the ¦ + S keys to save changes and exit to
the Setup window. Note: The Done command exits to the Setup window
without saving any system setting changes.

Basic Configuration - Network


To begin network configuration:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Network button, or


 Press the ¦ + N keys.
If you are using NCC-GL, go to page 4-20.

4-17
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

If you are using NCC-G or NCCWAN, the following window pops up:

Figure 4-17
Network Settings Window

The network map provides a convenient means of adding, deleting, or editing up


to 255 nodes. A scroll bar is provided to allow easy movement to any one of the
255 nodes.

Figure 4-18
Network Settings Window - Scrolled

The maximum node number that can be entered depends on the NCCG package
that was purchased. Nodes are added or deleted by using the respective Add or
Delete buttons. Nodes are edited by selecting a node and using the Edit button
or by double clicking on the node.
If the list is large, the search tool below the map can be used to find a node or
nodes in a group. Just a few characters is enough for a search. The Find Next
button becomes active when any characters are entered.

4-18
Chapter 4 Configuration

Buttons are arranged on the bottom of the map to allow you to exit (Done),
Group (combine nodes into a single icon), and request Help. The WAN Compo-
nents button is provided to enter and edit the COM-1 cabinet HNET boards, such
as HUB-4, NIC-C, PSC-12, etc., that are used on a WAN system.
If a node is connected through a HUB-4, the board's HNET address will appear in
the second column on the network map. The port number (1-4) that a panel is
assigned to appears in the third column. Refer to Figure 4-18. If a node is con-
nected through the XNET network, nothing will appear in these columns. NCC
entries will also blank these columns. If a node is assigned to a group, the group
name will appear in the last column.
To Edit or Add a system node, click on the appropriate button and the following
window pops up:

Figure 4-19
Editing Node Window

• Node Name: Enter the name used on the node control button. (Refer to
System Node Status Bar, pages 3-9 – 3-10.)
• Control Group: If the node is a member of a group, the group name will
appear here.
• Node Type: Select the type of hardware that the NCCG will find at this
node. The possible selections are:
• XL3 - Defines the node as an XL3. If selected, enter a custom message
for the XL3.
• MXL - Defines the node as MXL, MXLV or MXL-IQ. If selected, enter a
custom message for that MXL/MXLV/MXL-IQ.
• XLS - Defines the node as FireFinder XLS. If selected, enter a custom
message for that XLS.
• WAIO - Defines the node as a WAIO system. If selected, enter a
custom message for that WAIO.
4-19
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• NCC-G - Defines the node as an NCC. If selected, indicate either -


• This Unit - Assigns this NCC unit to the node.
• Remote Unit - Assigns a remote NCC unit to the node.
Note: The node assignment was entered during the initial installation.
This information can be changed at this point. The remote NCC
must be assigned here since it was not done during the initial
installation. The NCC node with the lowest node number assign-
ment will automatically receive each node's configuration. Nodes
assigned to a HUB-4 cannot have their configuration downloaded
automatically to the NCC. They must be manually imported. No
configuration can be downloaded or imported for XL3.
• Custom Message - Enter a custom message for events that are node-
only related, such as, A/C fail.
If the automatic download of the CSG-M is inhibited, manually import the
CSG-Ms at this point. Refer to System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/
Zeus Import on page 4-81 for information about manual download of the CSG-M.
If you add a node to the network map after the initial setup is complete, it is
recommended to reboot the NCC program after the node has been added.
To reboot the NCC program, press the ¦ + ” keys simultaneously. A dialog
box will appear twice asking if you would like to close. Click on the OK button
each time. As the computer is rebooting, the FireFinder screen will appear. Click
on the OK button to restart the NCC program.

NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup


If you are using the NCC-GL, the following window pops up:

Figure 4-20
NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup

4-20
Chapter 4 Configuration

The Use NIM Interface should be activated when NCC-GL is connected to the
XNET side of an actual NIM-1R. This allows a separate wire connection to the
NCC, independent of the MNET.
During the initial installation, this configuration information was entered. In this
menu you can reassign the node number and node button label for the NCC-GL
and MXL(IQ)/XLS. The assignments must be different.
In the NCC-GL section, the module number must be provided. This number
needs to be the same number assigned in the CSG-M/Zeus.
After completing this information, press the save button to save the information.

NCCG Node Edit Window


Selecting a node and either depressing the edit button or double clicking the
node places the operator in the edit window. The node example for an NCCG is
shown in Figure 4-21; the node example for an NCCG with the option TCP/IP
Used for System Link enabled is shown in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-21
NCCG Node Edit Window

4-21
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-22
NCCG Node Edit Window with TCP/IP Option

The following items are editable on the NCC-G Node Edit Window:
• Node #: Node address of the NCC on XNET. Due to XNET, this cannot
be higher than 64.
• Node Name: The name used to identify the NCC node on the node icon
and events.
• Control Group: Not used for NCC, as only panels can be members of a
group.
• Node Type: selection allows XL3, MXL, XLS, WAIO or NCC-G. Use
NCC-G for any NCCG configuration, whether it is an MXL Network
(XNET) system or a NCCWAN system, with a COM-1 (HNET) or a mix of
both.
• Type of NCC-G Node: For remote NCCs enter Remote Unit, for the
address of the NCC you are at, enter This Unit.
• Priority of NCCG for attached COM-1(s):
If no COM-1, leave the default of Primary and HNET # of 0.
If no COM-1 cabinet is attached to this NCC, Primary and HNET # of 0
should be the settings.
If a COM-1 is attached, set the NCC for either Primary or Secondary (if
only one NCC, select Primary) and set the HNET address used for the
NCC Primary or Secondary in the WAN Components map, usually 253 for
NCC Primary and 252 for the NCC Secondary.
• Message from MXL Configuration: For an NCC this will only display "No
MXL Message Available". Text entered in the edit area below this message
4-22
Chapter 4 Configuration

will appear in the title bar for the window that appears when the NCC nodes
icon is selected.
• TCP/IP Network Address: If the system option TCP/IP Used for NCC
Link is selected, this address will appear. The default address is 0.0.0.0
and with this address the NCC will use XNET to communicate NCC to
NCC. Any other address and the NCC will steer communications to this
NCC over the Ethernet LAN. This address will only appear for NCCs. Set
up the TCP/IP Address as follows:
For this NCC: Enter the TCP/IP address of the PC. This can be an IP
address configured by a DHCP, provided it remains stable. Note: A PCs
TCP/IP (or IP) address can be obtained by logging off the NCC, logging
on as an administrator and opening a Command Prompt window and
typing the command: IPCONFIG.
For other NCCs: Enter the TCP/IP address of that NCC's PC. The NCCs
at both ends must be set up for communications to exist.

MXL/XLS Node Edit Window


Figure 4-23 shows an MXL connected through the MXL/XLS Network or XNET.
Figure 4-24 shows an MXL connected through a COM-1 using a HUB-4. Figure 4-
25 shows an XL3 connected through the MXL/XLS Network or XNET. The follow-
ing items are editable or viewable on the MXL, XL3, or XLS Node Edit Window:
• Node #: Node address where the MXL, XL3, WAIO or XLS appears. If the
panel is on an MXL/XLS Network (XNET), this will be the actual network
address set up in the panel’s CSGM/Zeus network configuration (Max
address is 64).
If the MXL, WAIO or XL3 is attached through COM-1 using a HUB-4, the
node address is just an assigned location to allow for the panel to be
handled in the same way as an MXL/XLS Network (XNET) node.
• Node Name: The name used to identify the node on the node icon and
events. Note: This is what will appear in the event if you select system
option Node Name.
• Control Group: The group name that this node is a member of. It will be
blank if the node is not a member of a group.
• Node Type: This selection allows the choice of an XL3, MXL, WAIO or
XLS panel. The node type switches trouble messages, panel addressing,
communication types, etc. to agree with the type of panel.
• Message from MXL Configuration: If an MXL/XLS Network name is
available from the CSGM or Zeus it will appear here. The name that
appears here or entered into the text edit area below it will appear in the
title bar for the window that appears when the node's icon is selected.
• Default NCCG Control Setting: The primary, secondary, and tertiary
settings here show the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd priority NCC address which will
assume control of this node on power up. For a single NCC, enter the
NCC as the primary in case a second NCC is ever added.

4-23
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Location: This area defines how an MXL, XL3, WAIO or XLS panel is
interfaced to the NCC, either in an MXL/XLS network connected via
XNET, or connected through a COM-1 cabinet. Note: XLS can only be
connected through the MXL/XLS Network (XNET) and XL3 can only be
connected through the COM-1 cabinet.
The Location setting REMOTE COM-1 is not used at this time. Remote
WAN Components connected to a remote NCC are entered in the MORE
- SETUP - NETWORK - WAN Components map with the Remote check
box checked. The Remote setting tells the NCC that these boards are
connected in a COM-1 cabinet in another NCC and not at this NCC.
• Address: This area shows the HNET address of the HUB-4 that the MXL/
XL3 node is connected to. Port will reflect the HUB-4 port number used
for this node.
The Redundant HUB-4 field will contain the HNET address of the HUB-4
that will be the backup connection for this node. The port is not shown as
it is required to be the same as the primary. If no redundant HUB-4 exists,
this field will be 0.
• Type: This area shows the connection protocol used for interfacing the
MXL/XL3 to the NCC system. For an XL3, select CMI-300 (the MMX in an
XL3 emulates the CMI-300). For an MXL, CMI-300 is the only choice
available at this time. FSI or Global FSI interface connections will be
available in the future.
• Modem: The first selection that should be set when this field is enabled is
Modem. This is the selection used for all MXL, WAIO or XL3 panels that
will communicate via CMI-300 or MMX modems. The RS-485 selections
are for WAIO use only.

WAIO Node Edit Window


Figure 4-27 shows a WAIO connected through a modem or RS 485. The follow-
ing items are editable or viewable on the WAIO Node Edit Window:
• Node #: Node address where the WAIO system appears.
• Node Name: The name used to identify the node on the node icon and
events. Note: This is what will appear in the event if you select system
option Node Name.
• Default NCCG Control Setting: The primary, secondary, and tertiary
settings here show the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd priority NCC address which will
assume control of this node on power up. For a single NCC, enter the
NCC as the primary in case a second NCC is ever added.
• Location: The WAIO must be connected through COM1 (HNET) only.
• Address: This area displays the HNET address of the HUB-4 that the
WAIO system is connected to. The Port will reflect the HUB-4 port number
used for this node.The redundant HUB-4 setting is ignored for a WAIO
system.
• Modem: Choose RS-485.

4-24
Chapter 4 Configuration

The TCP/IP Network Address field is disabled for XL3, MXL, FireFinder-XLS and
WAIO node types and is only applicable for NCCs.
Note: For an MXL node connected through a HUB-4, automatic CSG-M down-
loads will not be possible because of the slow baud rate for the connection from
the CMI-300. For these nodes the CSG-M files must be manually imported into
the NCC using the MORE - SETUP - CSG IMPORT menu selection.

Figure 4-23
MXL Node Edit Window MXL Network Connect

Figure 4-24
MXL Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect
4-25
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-25
XL3 Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect

Figure 4-26
XLS Node Edit Window

4-26
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-27
WAIO Node Edit Window

WAN Components Network Map


Selecting the WAN Components button on the Network Node Map (Figure 4-17)
will bring up the WAN Components Network Map shown in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28
WAN Components Network Map

The WAN Components Network Map shows the connection and addressing of
the HNET boards and how they are interfaced to this particular NCC. HNET
components can be configured as local or remote to the NCCWAN. The most
convenient method to determine Local or Remote is “if the HNET is routed from
the NCC directly to the HUB-4/NIC-C it is local. However, if this NCC is con-
nected to a remote NCC via XNET only and the remote NCC has its own HNET
network, then this block is marked Remote.”

4-27
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The identity of the board must be defined (PSC-12, PSX-12, HUB-4 or NIC-C) to
allow proper supervision by the NCC. Should the WAN System be configured for
primary and redundant operation, then a redundant address will be shown for the
backup. For a HUB-4, the lowest HNET address for the board will by default
become the master (primary) of the two units, and this is the board that will
communicate with the panels. For all other boards, the primary and the redundant
both assume full operation and the redundant label is used only to reference that
the board is providing power or communications to redundant HUB-4s. Do not
use the redundant address for NCC Primary and NCC Secondary.

Adding WAN Components


To add a WAN component to the network map, click the Add button. The Add
WAN Component window will appear, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29
Add WAN Component Window

A drop down list box will provide the available choices. The HNET address, local/
remote and the address of the redundant component (if used) must also be
selected. Once all selections are completed, clicking the Add button will save the
selected component to the WAN network map.
The WAN component types available for selection are: PSC-12, NIC-C, HUB-4,
PSX-12, NCC Primary, and NCC Secondary. The LED Display item is not avail-
able at this time. The PSC-12, NIC-C, and HUB-4 components are editable
components and selecting these items and editing or double-clicking on these
items will bring up the respective edit windows.

Editing WAN Network Map Components


Editing a component in the WAN network map will bring up a window that is
dependent on the type of component selected. The example shown in Figure 4-30
is a HUB-4.

4-28
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-30
Editing The HUB-4 In The WAN Network Map

Notice that the Address block in the upper left corner of Figure 4-30 identifies the
HUB-4's HNET address. This address must match the address that is set on the
thumb wheel switch located on the HUB-4.
Just to the right of the Address is a check block marked Remote. Check this
block only if this NCC's HNET is not directly connected to the HUB (e.g.,
this option is for two or more HNETs connected by an XNET or XNET bridge).
The Type block identifies the module (HUB-4, PSC-12, PSX-12, etc.)
The Redundant Address block is used in systems which require a higher degree
of security and operational fail over. By inserting an address here, it identifies the
HUB (or other module) which will act as a hot backup to that module which is
noted in the address block (see above).
Should the primary module fail, the HUB (in this case) will automatically switch to
the backup and continue supervising the connected MXL(s).
The Status Window identifies what MXL or XL3's XNET node address is con-
nected to which of the HUB's four ports, as well as the custom message of the
control panel.
Below the Status Window are four blocked-out areas, which are identified as Port
1 through Port 4. These areas allow the System Technician to change the preset
default HUB port values.

4-29
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• The factory default transmit level is -10 dbm. It is recommended that this
setting not be changed unless it is determined that the telco-lines to the
MXL/XL3 are attenuating the signal sufficiently to inhibit proper communi-
cation. (Note: By adjusting the level closer to zero, you are increasing the
gain; conversely, if an MXL/XL3 is close by, you may have to adjust the
gain lower.) Transmit levels are ignored when a RS485 interface board is
used instead of a modem.
• Depending on your system configuration, Style 4 or Style 7 operation is
selected on this screen.
• The HUB has the provisions to detect ground faults on the communica-
tions channels to the MXL/XL3. This check box allows the user the ability
to inhibit ground detection based on local operations. (It is not uncommon
for existing systems to have communication lines grounded and operate
properly as ground detection/annunciation was not available at the time
the original system was installed. When new systems are connected to
existing wiring, grounds may be annunciated. This is not the fault of the
new system, but an indication of a pre-existing condition.) An NCC reset is
required to reflect any change of state of the ground fault inhibit check box.
• Style 7 level sensitivity is provided to change the point at which the circuit
fails over to the backup MXL/XL3 communication channel. Normally, the
default setting -23 dbm is sufficient. However, if you have a circuit with a
short run and are experiencing troubles, adjust the setting in 5 dbm
increments towards 0 dbm. The Style 7 level sensitivity is ignored when a
RS485 interface board is used instead of a modem.

The following items can be edited in the WAN Network Map:


•HNET address
•Redundant address
•Type of component
•Port assignment (Default Transmit and Sensitivity levels should not be
changed)
• Local or Remote
Editing a PSC-12 brings up the window shown in Figure 4-31. The PSC-12's
HNET address shown must match the address set on the actual PSC-12. Just to
the right of the address is the Remote check box. Check this box if the PSC-12 is
not directly connected to this NCC. The Tamper Enabled check box is not used.
For UL 1076, refer to the COM-1 Installation section and the instructions for
connecting the TSW-2 Tamper Switch.
The Battery Size selection is a drop down list box. Select the proper battery size
to agree with what is attached to the PSC-12. The Add Relay button is provided
to configure the relays on the PSC-12. The relays can be configured as Global
Alarm, Global Trouble or General Output. Refer to Figure 4-31.
• A relay configured as Global Alarm changes the respective PSC relay
state to off normal when there is any alarm on the NCC. When all alarms
are cleared on the NCC, the relay state will restore to normal.
4-30
Chapter 4 Configuration

• A relay configured as Global Trouble changes the respective PSC relay


state to off normal when there is any trouble on the NCC. When all
troubles are cleared on the NCC, the relay state will restore to normal.
• A relay configured as General Output will change state only through a
manual command from the NCC, using either the Device Output Control
or using the Disable/Enable (DIS/ENA) and Energize/DeEnergize (ENE/
DEE) manual commands.
• The address of the relays will be as follows:
NCC: PSC module address – Relay Number (1 to 4).
An example of a PSC address is: 2:8-1 for an NCC at address 2, PSC at
address 8, and relay number 1

Figure 4-31
Editing The PSC-12 In The WAN Network Map

Editing a NIC-C brings up the window shown in Figure 4-32. The NIC-C's HNET
address shown must match the address set on the NIC-C. Just below the ad-
dress is the Remote check box. Check this box if the NIC-C is not directly con-
nected to this NCC. Check the Style-4 or Style-7 option to agree with the HNET
wiring between the NIC-C and the NCC's NCC-1F/NCC-2F.

Figure 4-32
Editing The NIC-C In The WAN Network Map

Connection of COM-1 WAN Components


To connect to the COM-1 WAN components, the NCCWAN must contain a second
NCC-1F (NT) or NCC-2F (XP) card for communication to HNET components. The
boards should be set for COM1 and IRQ4 (NT) and COM5 (XP). The only excep-
tion to the second NCC-1F or NCC-2F will be when there is either no XNET net-
work or the XNET has been replaced by a LAN connection between NCCWANs.

4-31
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The NCC-1Fs (NT) or NCC-2Fs (XP) will connect to the XNET Network and to the
HNET. The HNET connection will be used to communicate with the COM-1modules.
With multiple NCCs, all must be connected by either an XNET or a LAN connec-
tion. The same holds true for Primary and Seconday NCCs on the HNET net-
work. These NCCs must also be connected on XNET (or a LAN). NCC to NCC
communication takes place on the XNET or the LAN connection. NCC to WAN
components (COM-1 modules) communication, for both the Primary and the
Seconday, takes place on HNET.
The system (NCCs) can be configured for primary and secondary operation. One
of the two NCCWANs will be configured as the primary of the HNET network. The
primary will provide all control and supervision to all HNET connected modules.
Should the primary NCC fail or be shut down, the secondary (NCC) will take over
the functions of the primary NCCWAN.
Failure of both the primary NCC and secondary NCC will cause the COM-1
boards to declare an HNET network supervision trouble. This will cause the HUB-
4s to stop supervising its ports, which, in turn, will cause the fire alarm systems
connected to the HUB-4s to report a supervision trouble.

Supervision of COM-1 WAN Components


The primary NCCWAN will perform all supervision, monitoring and control of the
COM-1 based WAN components. It will verify the presence of the PSC-12, NIC-C,
HUB-4, PSX-12 and the secondary NCCWAN.
Failure of a board to answer three requests will be reported as an NCCWAN “in”
trouble. This trouble will be labeled:

“XX:YYY:TTT Module Not Responding”


where:
XX = 2 digit node address of the NCC.
YYY = 3 digit HNET address of the board or WAN component.
TTT = 3 character representation of the board or WAN component type.
Sample types:
PSC Power supply
PSX Power supply extender
HUB HUB-4
NIC NIC-C HNET network interface card
NCC NCC primary/secondary

The “out” of trouble will report as soon as there is one valid response from the
trouble causing WAN component.
The NCCWAN will generate troubles pertaining to the HUB-4 ports and to the
individual panels connected to the ports. Any failure in node (panel) supervision
will cause the NCC to mark the panel's ICON with an “X” through the node as
displayed on the NCC's VDT. The following troubles will further specify port

4-32
Chapter 4 Configuration

troubles. The port troubles will indicate the HUB-4 address and port with an
NCCWAN trouble as follows:
“XX:YYY-ZZZ TTT Trouble Type Node:NNN"
where:
XXX = 2 digit node address of the NCC.
YYY = 3 digit HNET address of the board or WAN component.
TTT = 3 character representation of the board or WAN component type.
ZZZ = 3 character port number (001-004)
NNN = 1 - 3 digit node address

Trouble Type = one of the following types of troubles:


• Control Panel Not Responding - The fire alarm panel attached is not
communicating and has dropped its modem carrier signal. This is a
normal trouble when a panel (and its CMI-300/MMX) has been powered
down. This trouble will also correspond with a Carrier Fail LED on a
HUB-4 port and with an ‘X’ through the node icon on the NCC. The TTT
board type does not appear for this trouble.
• Style 7 Failure - The fire alarm panel is still communicating but the
HUB-4 has noticed a open or break failure in one of the two pairs used
for Style 7. The Open/Short LED on the HUB-4 will light with this trouble.
This trouble is also used to report Style 7 failures of WAIO connections.
• Ground Fault - The HUB-4 is indicating a ground on a port for the wiring
between the CMI-300 and itself. The Gnd Fault LED on the HUB-4 will
light with this trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate a ground on a
port for the wiring between the WAIOs and itself.
• Internal Modem Failure - The HUB-4 is indicating a failure or a missing
Modem Block on one of its ports.
• Module Comm. Failure - The HUB-4 is failing to see valid supervision
on a port, either to the panel or internal on the card. Also if an NCC fails
to supervise a HUB-4 due to a NCC shutdown or restart, the HUB-4 in
turn stops supervising the CMI-300 or MMX, which will cause this
trouble. A flashing Open/Short LED on the HUB-4 will light with this
trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate a communication failure on
a HUB-4 port connected to WAIOs.
• Unspecified Node Responding - A panel was found connected on a
port that was not configured in the NCC network map. The TTT board
type and the NNN node number (as no node is assigned) do not ap-
pear for this trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate the presence
of unconfigured WAIOs on a HUB-4 port.
• No Response To Command - This trouble is controlled by a system
option that allows catching any command that gets no response from a
panel. The option is turned off by default and can be turned on at the
Maintenance level. The TTT board type does not appear for this trouble.
• Missing Hourly Op Message - This trouble is also controlled by a
system option that allows catching a missing on the hour interface
operational message out of a panel. The option is turned off by default
and can be turned on at the Maintenance level. The TTT board type
does not appear for this trouble.

4-33
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

WAIO Supervision: WAIO network problems display as troubles on the assigned


HUB-4 port as described above. These troubles include: Style 7 failure, ground
fault, module communications fail and unspecified node responding.
WAIO module and device troubles display as follows:
“WNODE:WMODULE-WDEVICE"
where:
WNODE = network WAIO node address.
WMODULE = WAIO module address. (This is the address on the 2 rotary
switches on the WAIO.)
WDEVICE = address of WAIO inputs (1 - 4) or the address of WAIO outputs
(5 - 8). The WDEVICE address will not be present if the trouble relates to the
WAIO module and not an input or output.

WAIO device troubles are:


• Zone Loop Open - A specified WAIO input has an open in its wiring.
• Input Disarmed In or Out - A WAIO input (1-4) has been disarmed (in
trouble) or re-armed (out of trouble).
• Output Disarmed In or Out - A WAIO output (5 - 8) has been disarmed
(in trouble) or re-armed (out of trouble).
WAIO module troubles are:
• Module Not Responding - The given WAIO configured in the system to
be on a HUB-4 port is not present.
• Device Communications Error - The given WAIO module is having
trouble communicating back to the HUB-4.
• Configuration Error - The given WAIO module has been configured
incorrectly.
• Watchdog Triggered - The given WAIO module had its watchdog timer
trigger a restart of the WAIO firmware.

Additional non-port related troubles are:


• Redundant Peer Supv Fail - A HUB-4 is configured to have a redundant
HUB-4 and it does not exist or is not communicating at the proper address.
• Module ROM Failure - A HUB-4 running internal memory tests has found
a failure in its ROM (Flash).
• Module RAM Failure - A HUB-4 running internal memory tests has found
a failure in its RAM.
• No Battery in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 is configured in the NCC to have a
battery and it is not present.
• PSC-12 is on Battery - A PSC-12 has indicated it is running on battery.
• Low Voltage Battery - A PSC-12 has indicated that it has a battery whose
voltage is low due to failure to take a charge, terminal troubles, etc.
• Battery Cutoff - A PSC-12 has indicated the battery cutoff switch has fired.

4-34
Chapter 4 Configuration

• Ground fault positive in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 has found a ground fault on


its positive output.
• Ground fault negative in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 has found a ground fault on
its negative output.
• Thermistor Trouble - A PSC-12 has found trouble with an internal thermistor.
• Tamper Switch Trouble - A PSC-12 has found a supervision trouble with
its tamper switch.
• AC Failure - A PSC-12 has reported loss of AC.
• AC Brownout - A PSC-12 has reported low AC levels or brownout conditions.
• 2A src to backplane shutdown - A PSC-12 has reported the output provid-
ing the 2 amp source to the backplane has been shutdown.
• No 6.2V supplied to backplane - A PSC-12 has reported the output sup-
plying the 6.2V to the backplane has been shutdown.
• Loop A Failure - A NIC-C set up for Style 7 has found a failure with HNET
on its loop A pair between the NIC-C and an NCC NCC-1F/NCC-2F card.
• Loop B Failure - A NIC-C set up for Style 7 has found a failure with HNET
on its loop B pair between the NIC-C and an NCC NCC-1F/NCC-2F card.
• Style 7 Failure - A NIC-C is configured for Style 4 and is wired as Style 7.
• Ground Fault - A NIC-C has reported a ground fault on its HNET wiring
between an NCC-1F/NCC-2F card in the NCC and itself.
• Transfer To Redundant Lock - A HUB-4 with a redundant HUB-4 has
transferred to back and forth more than 3 times and will lock in to the
current active HUB-4 until the next NCC reset. Note: the inactive or back-
up HUB-4 will blink its green power LED.

WAIO Network Settings


Selecting the WAIO setting button on the network map (see Figure 4-17) will
bring up the WAIO Settings window shown in Figure 4-33. Note: The WAIO
Settings button is enabled only if a WAIO node is selected in the nodes list.

Figure 4-33
WAIO Settings Window

4-35
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

In the WAIO Settings window you can add, edit or delete a WAIO. It displays four
columns:
• Address: The WAIO address as physically set in the WAIO system.
Available addresses are 1 - 96.
• Name: A name description for the WAIO (optional).
• Inputs: Number of configured inputs for this WAIO.
• Outputs: Number of configured outputs for this WAIO.

Selecting the Add WAIO button in the WAIO Settings window will bring up the
WAIO Editing window shown in Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34
WAIO Editing Window
• WAIO Address: Set the address of this WAIO between 1 - 96.
• Name: Set the custom name for this WAIO.
• Inputs (1-4): Choose the input for each from a pull-down menu (Alarm,
Supervisory, Security, Trouble or Status). Non-selected inputs will display
"Not Used".
• Outputs (1-4): Choose the output for each from a pull-down menu (Gen-
eral Usage, Silence, Reset or Acknowledge). Non-selected outputs will
display "Not Used".
• Pulse Width: Choose the output for each:
Reset, Silence or Acknowledge - ¼, ½, 1 or 2 seconds.
General Usage - ½ to 25½ seconds (in ½ second increments).
• Output Mode: Choose the output mode for each from a pull-down menu
(Steady, Pulsed or Continuous).
• Default: Sets all inputs to Status with no outputs selected.

Basic Configuration - Device Edit


To begin Device Edit configuration:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


4-36
Chapter 4 Configuration

The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Device Edit button, or


 Press the ¦ + V keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-35
Device Edit Window - Input Tab

INPUT
The Input tab of the Device Edit window provides the following selections:
• Device Name / Standard Device Name: Enter a standard device name
in one of the following ways
- type in the conventional node: module-device format
MXL - NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER: DEVICE NUMBER
XLS - The XLS format will be one of the following:
NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER
NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER^COMPONENT

NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER.SUBMODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER


- type in a user assigned name (optional - Only available if Custom
Device Names was selected in the NCC-G System Settings Window -
Options Tab as described on page 4-4.)
- select BROWSE and use the Select a Device to Edit window as
shown in Figures 4-36 and 4-37.

4-37
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-36
Select a Device to Edit Window (With Component)

Figure 4-37
Select a Device to Edit Window (With Sub-Module)

• Custom Device Name: Enter a custom name of up to 11 characters for


the MXL and up to 15 characters for the XLS selected device (Only
available if Custom Device Names was selected in the NCCG System
Settings Window - Options Tab as described on page 4-4.)
• Custom Input Message: Enter a custom input message of up to 510
characters. This message overrides any existing message from the
CSG-M/Zeus. If a CSG-M/Zeus has been imported from a node, the
MXL's/XLS's custom message will appear after the “MXL:” or "XLS:".
NOTE: The MXL/XLS message can be copied (CTRL+INS) and pasted
(SHIFT+INS) into the full custom message area prior to editing.

GRAPHICS
This tab, as shown in Figure 4-38, enables the user to assign a device icon and
background graphics to the selected device.

4-38
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-38
Device Edit Window - Graphics Tab
To Assign an Icon:

 Click on the button. The following window pops up:

Figure 4-39
Device Icon Select Window

NOTE: The button only appears if there is no device icon assigned.


Otherwise, the previously assigned icon appears as the button.
Click on the down arrow to select the icon to represent this device and click OK.
The available selections are listed below:

Ion Detector Flow Switch

Valve Monitor Switch Pressure Switch

Manual Station Photo Detector

Roof Smoke Detector Thermal Detector

Under Floor Smoke Detector Air Duct Detector

4-39
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Fire Indicator Panel Command Center

Fan Motorized Damper

Elevator Purge Activation

Fan Override Magnetic Door Holder

Security Device

Custom icons can be produced using the Icon Editor. Details on the Icon Editor
can be found on pages 4-66 – 4-72.

To Assign a Background Graphic:

 From the Device Edit window - Graphics tab, click on the NEW
button, or

 Press the ¦ + N keys


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-40
Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup

In the Background Image section, the image subdirectory appears. Enter the
name of the background image for Zoom level 1 or

4-40
Chapter 4 Configuration

 From the Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window, click on the
FIND button, or

 Press the ¦ + F keys


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-41
Open Window

Select the file that contains the background image for Zoom level 1 and click OK.
NOTE: Each image previews in the Background Image section of the
Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window as you single click
on it.
Click OK in the Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window. If you select a bitmap
image with a file extension of .bmp, .pcx, or .gif, the following window pops up:

Figure 4-42
Device Icon Placement Editor - Bitmap Drawing

4-41
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

If you select a CAD drawing with a file extension of .dwg, .dxf, or .dwf, the follow-
ing window pops up (Refer to Appendix G for a summary of supported .dwg, .dxf,
and .dwf file formats):

Figure 4-43
Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing

This window consists of two panes. The large pane displays the whole back-
ground image and the small pane in the upper right corner is a guide that shows
where you are in the larger image. This is helpful when using the additional
features that allow you to navigate around a CAD background image.
(Refer to Figure 4-44):
• Zoom In / Zoom Out: Click on the magnifier buttons on the toolbar.
• Panning: Click on the background drawing (not a device icon). Then hold the
left mouse button while dragging the background drawing to a new position.

Figure 4-44
Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing With Zoom

4-42
Chapter 4 Configuration

Placing an Icon on a Background Graphic:


The selected icon appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphic. Click on
this icon, hold the mouse button down and drag the icon into position. Release
the mouse button. The icon is now positioned on the background graphic.
The address and the device custom message for an icon appear on the bottom
of the window when the mouse is placed on the icon and the left mouse button
is clicked.
To reposition this icon, click on the icon, hold the mouse button down and drag
the icon into another position.

NOTE: Click on the button to close the screen when icon


placement is complete. The icon placement must be saved first.

Click on the button in the toolbar to show all previously

placed icons.

Click on the button to save the image file and icon placement.

When changes have been implemented on the icon placement,


this button must be pressed to save the change.

Click on the button in the toolbar to Zoom In (CAD drawings


only).

Click on the button in the toolbar to Zoom Out (CAD drawings


only).

 From the Device Edit window, click on the NEXT or PREVIOUS


buttons, or

 Press the ¦ + N or ¦ + P keys to move forward or


backward through the list of installed devices.
Repeat the process described above until all devices have been assigned icons
and placed on all appropriate zoom levels of background graphics. When you
have finished,

 Click on the DONE button, or


 Press the ¦ + D keys to exit and return to the Setup window.
4-43
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

OPTIONS
The Options, as shown in Figure 4-45, enable the user to select the style of
display for a status point.

Figure 4-45
Device Edit - Options Tab

• Standard Device Name: A device address will display active here if the
device has been identified as a status in the MXL/MXLV/MXL-IQ's CSG-M
or the XLS's Zeus.
• Display Status Events As: This section allows the user to select the
style of the display of the status event. The selection will also delegate the
priority of the status event when multiple events are being reported to the
NCC. The choices are as follows:
- Not displayed: The status event will not display in the event message
window.
- Status: The status event will display in a light blue color with a status
icon in the event window.
- Security: The status event will display in a magenta color with a secu-
rity icon in the event window.
- Supervisory: The status event will display in a blue color with a super-
visory icon in the event window.
• Self Restoring: When this option is activated, an OUT event from a
device event will not require acknowledgment and will clear the IN event.
This option cannot be activated if the system is configured as NFPA
72 Proprietary.
Repeat the process described above until all status points have been identified.
When you finish, click on the UPDATE button to save your entries. Then click on

4-44
Chapter 4 Configuration

the DONE button, or repeat the process described above until all devices have
been assigned icons and placed on all appropriate zoom levels of background
graphics. When you have finished,

 Click on the DONE button, or


 Press the ¦ + D keys to exit and return to the Setup window.

Control and Event Customization - Macros


A macro is an automated sequence of system commands that executes after
pressing a quick combination of keys, rather than selecting each task one at a
time using the mouse or the keyboard. Macros simplify time-consuming and
often-performed tasks. The number of macro commands that can be stored is
dependent on hard drive space.

User-Defined Macro Commands


NOTE: There are fixed macro commands that are automatically installed
and cannot be edited or deleted. These fixed macro commands
are the same as those used in the MXL-VDT and are shown in the
Fixed Macro Commands table in Chapter 6.
To add, modify or delete user-defined macro commands:
 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Macros button, or


 Press the ¦ + M keys.

4-45
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The following window pops up:

Figure 4-46
Macro Manager Window
Adding A Macro

 Click on the New button, or


 Press the ¦ + N keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-47
New Macro Name Window

Enter a unique macro name of your choice. A macro name can be a unique letter
combination, a function key, a SHIFT and function key combination, or an ALT
and function key combination. The name can consist of up to 20 characters,
including spaces (the name can be more than one word). WING 2 is an example
of a valid macro name. However, certain key combinations are already in use by
the NCCG system and cannot be reassigned. These are listed in the Function
Key Assignments section in Chapter 6.
NOTE: In order for user defined macros to appear in the notebook when
the USER button is pressed, they must be specifically named - U1
through U40, as described in Chapter 6.
To save the new macro name and continue:

4-46
Chapter 4 Configuration

 Click on the Add button, or


 Press the ¦ + A keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-48
Macro Definition Editor

In the Macro Definition Editor window:


• Macro Name: The new name appears in this window.
• Password Level: Select the password level for this macro using the up
and down arrows.
• Description: Enter an explanation, up to 40 characters long, of what the
macro does. This remark text is displayed on the main console and on the
logging printer each time the macro runs.
• Command Script: Enter the command(s) that performs the action of this
macro. You may enter commands with modifiers and arguments. If the
script contains more than one command, type a semicolon (;) between
each command and the one that follows it. The command script can be up
to 1,023 characters in length. (See Appendix F for more information.)

To save the new macro definition and continue:

 Click on the Update button, or


 Press the ¦ + U keys.
Modifying a Macro
Select the name of the macro in the Macro Manager window and click on the Edit
button. The Macro Definition Editor window pops up. Modify the information as
described in the Adding A Macro section, page 4-46.
4-47
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

 Click on the Update button or press the U key to save your changes.
Deleting a Macro
Select the name of the macro in the Macro Manager window and click on the
Delete button. The Macro Definition Editor window pops up.

 Click on the Delete button or press the ¦ + L key.


Printing a List of Macros
From the Macro Manager window:

 Click on the Print button, or  Press the ¦ + P keys.


Exiting the Macro Manager
From the Macro Manager window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + D keys.

Control and Event Customization - Holidays


Holidays are dates that may be treated in a special way when activating timed
events. To define, modify, or list holidays using the Holiday Manager:
 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Holidays button, or


 Press the ¦ + o key
The following window pops up:

4-48
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-49
Holiday Manager Window

• Name and Detail: Displays a list (name and description) of any holidays
that have already been defined and entered.
• Holiday Name: Enter a unique holiday name of your choice. The name
can be more than one word, and can consist of up to 16 characters
(including spaces).
• Perennial: Select this if the holiday occurs on the same date every year.
The system automatically applies this date every year regardless of the
year entered in the date field. If not selected, the holiday only applies to
the year specified in the date field.
• Multi-day Holiday: Select if the holiday lasts for more than one day, or if
other days (such as an adjacent weekend) are treated as part of the
holiday. If not selected, the holiday consists of just one day.
NOTE: A Multi-day holiday has two limitations on the dates. First, both
dates must belong to the same year (even for the Perennial
holidays, for which the date does not otherwise matter). Second,
the End Date must come later in the calendar than the Start Date.
An example of these limits is that you cannot combine New Year’s
Eve and New Year’s Day into a single Multi-day holiday; they must
be defined as two separate holidays.
• Start Date (MM/DD/YY): Enter the start (or only) date for the holiday. If
Multi-day holiday is selected, enter the end date for the holiday also.

Printing a List of Holidays


From the Holiday Manager window:

 Click on the Print button, or  Press the ¦ + P keys.

4-49
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Saving Definitions and Exiting the Holiday Manager


From the Holiday Manager window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + D keys.


Control and Event Customization - Events
Events are time triggers that can be used to automatically control system parameters
such as arming and disarming door monitoring contacts, changing sensitivities, etc.
The events can be set to occur any day, all days including and excluding holidays.
A comprehensive filter can be set for each event. You must be logged in at
password level C and Time Controlled Events must be selected in the NCCG
System Settings Window - Options Tab as shown on pages 4-4 – 4-5. To
define, modify, list or delete events using the Event Manager:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S key
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Events button, or


 Press the ¦ + E keys
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-50
4-50 Event Manager Window
Chapter 4 Configuration

Adding an Event

 Click on the New button, or  Press the ¦ + N keys.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-51
New Event Name Window

Enter a unique event name of your choice. The name can consist of up to 20
characters, including spaces (the name can be more than one word).
NIGHTMODE is an example of a valid event name. To save the new event name
and continue:

 Click on the Add button, or  Press the ¦ + A keys.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-52
Event Definition Editor - Script Tab

4-51
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

In the Event Definition Editor - Script Tab window, configure the following:
• Event Name: The new name appears in this window.
• Description: Enter an explanation, up to 40 characters long, of what the
event is. This remark text is displayed on the main console and on the
logging printer each time the event runs.
• Command Script: Enter the command(s) that performs the action of this
event. If the script contains more than one command, type a semicolon (;)
between each command and the one that follows it. Refer to Appendix C
for basic command scripts and Appendix F for command script guidelines.
NOTE: Most NCCG commands cannot be activated as timed events.
Presently, the valid commands are DEENERGIZE, ENERGIZE,
ENABLE, DISABLE, SILENCE, DEVICE NODE, LIST, and
REMOTE. If any other command is entered into a timed event
script, an Invalid Command error results when the event comes due.

 Click on the Settings tab, or  Press the ´ key.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-53
Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab

In the Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab window configure the following:
• Activation Mode: Select one of the following choices:
Daily – The event activates once (at most) each day, at the specified
time, including or excepting dates specified in the remainder of this editing
process.

4-52
Chapter 4 Configuration

Daily Solar – The event activates not at a specified time, but rather at a
specified altitude of the sun. For example, this allows an event to occur
every evening at sunset.
One Time Only – The event takes place just once, at the specified time on
the specified date. An event defined with the One Time Only activation
mode is deleted automatically after activation at its specified time and date.

Daily
If you have selected the Daily activation mode, configure the following:
• Active Days: Select the days of the week for which this timed event is to
occur.
• Holidays: Select from one of the following choices:
Ignore – The event will occur on the specified days of the week without
regard to the exceptional dates (Holidays or Special Dates).
Include – The event will occur on the specified days of the week, only if it
is an exceptional date. Standard holidays are defined and may be listed
by selecting the Holiday button. See Holidays on page 4-48.
Exclude – The event will occur on the specified days of the week, except
on the exceptional dates.
• Event Trigger Time: Enter the time of day when this daily event is to
occur by clicking on the up or down arrows next to the hour and minute
displays.

Daily Solar
If you have selected the Daily Solar activation mode, configure the following:
• Active Days: Select the days of the week for which this timed event is to
occur.
• Holidays: Select from one of the following choices:
Ignore – The event will occur on the specified days of the week without
regard to the exceptional dates (Holidays or Special Dates).
Include – The event will occur on the specified days of the week, plus any
exceptional date. Standard holidays are defined and may be listed by
selecting the Holiday button. See Holidays on page 4-48.
Exclude – The event will occur on the specified days of the week, except
on the exceptional dates.
• Solar Values: If you have selected Daily Solar as the activation mode,
enter the following information –
1. The solar altitude angle in degrees (can be determined with a
protractor)
2. The direction of this angle relative to the horizon (Above Horizon or
Below Horizon)
3. The direction of solar motion (Rising or Setting).

4-53
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

For example, standard sunrise and sunset occur when the sun is about 1
degree below the horizon, so a sunset event would specify 1 degree
below the horizon, setting. A sunrise event would specify 1 degree below
the horizon, rising. Standard twilight occurs when the sun is 6 degrees
below the horizon, so a sundown event would specify 6 degrees below
the horizon, rising.
NOTE: Use caution when setting angles far from the horizon. For
example, at the latitude of New York City, the sun never gets more
than about 73 degrees above the horizon, so an event set to run at
75 degrees would never occur. At this same latitude, an event set
to run at 26 degrees above the horizon would run daily for most of
the year, but would not run at all for a few days in late December
when the sun stays very low in the sky.
One Time Only
If you have selected the One Time Only activation mode, configure the
following:
• Time Mode: Select one of the following two choices:
Clock – If you want to set a particular time of day (such as 15:15, or a
quarter past 3 P.M.), use the default Clock time mode. Enter the time and
date in the appropriate fields using the format described below for Event
Trigger Time.
From Now – If you wish to have a One Time Only time that is relative to
the present time, select From Now. Enter the time (up to 23 hours and 59
minutes) from now until when the event is to occur using the format
described below for Event Trigger Time. For example, select From Now
and enter 1:45 to cause the event to activate an hour and forty-five min-
utes from now.
• Event Trigger Time: Enter the time of day or the number of hours and
minutes when this event is to occur by clicking on the up or down arrows
next to the hour and minute displays.
• Event Trigger Date: If you have selected the Clock Time Mode, enter
the date when this event is to occur by clicking on the up or down arrows
next to the day, month and year displays.
To save the new event definition and continue:

 Click on the Update button, or  Press the ¦ + u keys.


Modifying an Event
Select the name of the event in the Event Manager window and click on the Edit
button. The Event Definition Editor window pops up. Modify the information as
described in the Adding An Event section, page 4-51.

 Click on the Update button, or  Press the ¦ + u keys to


save your changes.
4-54
Chapter 4 Configuration

Deleting an Event
Select the name of the event in the Event Manager window and click on the
Delete button. The Event Definition Editor window pops up.

 Click on the Delete button, or  Press the ¦ + D keys.


Printing a List of Events and Definitions
From the Event Manager window:

 Click on the Print button, or  Press the ¦ + P keys.


Saving Events and Definitions
From the Event Manager window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + D keys.


Graphic Image Maintenance - Images
To begin importing images:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or


 Press the ¦ + I keys,
The following window pops up:

4-55
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-54
Images Window - Base Tab

Importing Base Browse and Unprogrammed Event Images


The Base Browse Image appears in the graphics window when no other events
and their corresponding graphics are displaying. The Unprogrammed Events
Image appears in the graphics window as the default image when an event
occurs for which there is no specifically assigned graphic.
In the Images - Base Tab window:
• Base Browse Image or Image Use for Unprogrammed Events: Enter
the file name of a graphic or Click the Find button to scroll through direc-
tories and select an image. NCC Graphics supports .bmp, .pcx, .gif, .dwg,
.dwf, or .dxf file formats. (Refer to Appendix G for a summary of supported
.dwg, .dwf and .dxf file formats.) The following window appears:

Figure 4-55
Graphic Selector Window

The Graphic Selector window displays a thumbnail view for each selected
filename. Select an image file to open by typing in the location and filename or

 Click on the Find button, or  Press the ¦ + F keys.


4-56
Chapter 4 Configuration

The following window appears:

Figure 4-56
Select a Graphic Window

Select an image file to open by choosing:


• The type of file from Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in the
subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria.
• The letter of the Look in: on which the folder is located.
Select a file from the List box, or type an existing file name in the File name box.

Click the Open button or  Press the ¦ + O keys to select this file.
The filename will then appear in the Images window. Note: To preview an image,
double click on the filename and the image will be displayed in the Graphic
Selector window.

Graphic Display Area Background Color


This option should be set to match the background color of the images in your
image database. When a graphic image is smaller than the graphic viewing
display, this option fills in the viewing space around the graphic image with the
selected color.
To change the Display Area Background Color, click on the CHANGE button. The
following window pops up:

Figure 4-57
Change Background Color Selector

4-57
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To match the color in the Current Color box to your image's background, slide each
of the color bars (red, green or blue) to the left or right to achieve the appropriate
color mixture. The SET button locks in your color combination. The CANCEL
button deletes the color combination. The RESET button sets the color back to a
prior combination setting.

Creating and Editing Images

 Click on the Images tab, or  Press the ´ key.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-58
Images Window - Images Tab

In the Images - Images Tab window:

 Click on the Create button, or  Press the ¦ + C keys.


OR Select a filename from the display list and

 Click on the Edit button, or  Press the ¦ + E keys.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-59
4-58 NCCG Graphic Editor
Chapter 4 Configuration

For more information on the NCCG Graphic Editor, refer to Chapter 8.

Adding Images
To copy an image file from disk or diskette to the database

 Click on the Add/Copy button, or  Press the ¦ + A keys.


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-60
Copy File Window

• Source: Enter the location and name of the file that you want to copy or
click the Find button to scroll through directories and select a file. The
following window appears:

Figure 4-61
Select Source File Window

Select a source file to copy by choosing:


• The type of file from List Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in
the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria.
• The letter of the Drive on which the file is located.
• The name of the Folders in which the file is located.
• The name of the File that you wish to open.

Click the Network button to select a file from a network drive. The Map Network
Drive Window pops up:

4-59
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-62
Map Network Drive Window

• Drive: Click the down arrow to display the first available drive letter for the
Network connection. Choose this letter or select another drive letter.
• Path: Specify the network path for the connection. You can select a
previous network path from Path or type in the name of a computer and
shared directory.
• Connect As: To connect using a different user account, enter the account
name.
• Reconnect At Logon: Click to clear this check box if you do not want to
connect to the shared directory each time you log on.
• Expand By Default: Select this option to automatically expand the list in
Shared Directories to display the computer in your computer's domain or
workgroup.
• Shared Directories: Shows networks, domains and workgroups,
computers and shared directories.
Click the OK button to map the network drive or click the Cancel button to return
to the previous window without mapping the network drive.

 Click on the Help button or  press the ¦ + H keys to view a


detailed description of the features and tips for the Map Network Drive function.

Once you have mapped a network drive and highlighted a source file, click the
OK button to select this file. The filename then appears in the Copy File window.
• Destination: Enter the location and complete filename (name.extension)
for the destination or click the Find button to scroll through directories and
select a file. The following window appears:

4-60
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-63
Select Destination Window

Select a destination file to copy to by choosing:


• The type of file from List Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in
the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria.
• The letter of the Drive on which the file will be located.
• The name of the Folder in which the file will be located.
• The name of the File that you wish to copy to.
Click the OK button to select this file. The filename will then appear in the Copy
File window.
To begin copying an image file from disk or diskette to the database

 Click on the Copy button.


When the progress bar at the bottom of the Copy File window reaches 100%,

 Click on the Done button to return to the Images Tab of the Images
window.

Graphic Image Maintenance - Import


Data from the MXL-G machine must be resident in an NCCG machine before
files can be imported. First, create a subdirectory in WIN NT/XP and copy the
*.XLG (screens) and *.DAT (database) files into that subdirectory. Refer to Exiting
NCC to the Windows NT Desktop on page 2-51. (It is likely that all these files
together will be larger than 1.44 MB and will not fit on a floppy disk.)
To begin importing existing MXL-G\CXL-G graphic databases:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.

4-61
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or


 Press the ¦ + I keys.
Click on the Images tab, then click on the Import button.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-64
Import XL-G Graphic Data Base Window

In the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base window:


• XL-G Data File Location: Enter the file name of an XL-G Data File or

 Click on the Select button, or  Press the ¦ + S keys.

4-62
Chapter 4 Configuration

A window similar to the following window appears:

Figure 4-65
XL-G File Selection Window

Select an XL-G file to import by choosing:


• The List files of type - <All Files> to list everything in the subdirectory, or
other choices to help narrow the search criteria.
• The letter of the Drive on which the file is located.
• The name of the Folder in which the file is located.
• The name of the File that you wish to open.
Click the OK button to select this file. The filename will then appear in the Import
XL-G Graphic Data Base window.
NOTE: You only need to select one of the *.dat (database) files. The
NCC-G will assume all the database files are in that directory
during the import process.
Complete the importing process by selecting the following:
• Target Image File Type: Select the appropriate file type –
PCX - PC Paint (default - recommended)
BMP - Bitmap
GIF - Compuserve
TGA - Targa (Additional supported file types are shown in Figure 4-56.)
• Source Data Base Type: Select the appropriate type –
CXL-G Data Base
MXL-G Data Base
If MXL-G Data Base is selected, choose the correct XLG Import Node by
clicking on the up and down arrows.
• Over Write Existing Data Base: Select this option by clicking on the box
if you wish to copy the new data base information over the existing infor-
mation.

4-63
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To begin importing the new data base:

 Click on the Begin Import button.


Two things happen -
1. The graphics files convert from *.xlg format to the chosen format (the
default is *.pcx).
2. An XL-G or CXL-G database imports and is inserted into the NCC-G
standard database.

• Processed Images - As files are imported, filenames of processed


images scroll past in this window.
• Missing Images - As files are imported, filenames of missing images
appear in this window.

NOTE: Files showing in the Missing Images window should be recopied


into the import directory. The import procedure should then be
repeated.

Exiting the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base without Saving Selections
From the Images window:

 Click on the Exit button, or  Press the ¦ + e keys.


Rebuilding The Database

If the database needs repair  Click on the Rebuild button


The following window pops up:

Figure 4-66
Image Data Base Rebuild Window

4-64
Chapter 4 Configuration

 Click on the Start button, or  Press the ¦ + S keys.


The following message appears in the window:

Figure 4-67
Please Wait! Window

When the database has been rebuilt, the following message appears in the window:

Figure 4-68
Completed! Window

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + D keys to


return to the Images window.

Image and Device Relationship Report

 Click on the Report button and the following screen will appear:

Figure 4-69
Image and Device Relationship Report Screen
4-65
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

This report outlines which devices have been programmed in the NCCG and
which have not. This report can run on criteria such as programmed versus
nonprogrammed, and zoom level. Zoom Level 1 creates a shorter report for a
quick review. This report will print to the report printer.
An example of an Image and Device Relationship Report showing all pro-
grammed devices, the zoom levels, and the X and Y positions in those levels
follows:
Image and Device Relationship Report
Includes:
devices programmed to images
all zoom levels
Devices Assigned By Image
D:\NCC2\PCX\SITE.PCX
01:00l=001 Level=1 X-182 Y=600
02:001-023 Level=1 X=610 Y=417
02:001-024 Level=1 X=611 Y=417

This is followed by a list of Images Assigned By Device, as shown in the next


example:
Images Assigned By Device
01:001-001 placed on:
Level=l Image=D:\NCC2\PCX\SITE.PCX
01:001-012 placed on:
Level=l Image=.\IMAGES\10.PCX
02:001-023 placed on:
Level=l Image=D:\NCC2\PCX\STTE.PCX
Level=2 Image=D:\NCC2\PCX\Z6S.PCX
Level=3 Image=D:\NCC2\PCX\Z6Sl.PCX

Saving Selections and Exiting the Images Window


From the Images window:

 Click on the Save button.


Exiting the Images Window without Saving Selections
From the Images window:

 Click on the Done button.


Icon Editor
The icon editor is used to add icons to the NCC-G. These newly added icons are
in addition to the standard set of icons supplied with the system.

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


4-66
Chapter 4 Configuration

The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up (see figure below).

Figure 4-70
Selecting The Icons Button

 From the Setup window, click on the Icons button, or


 Press the ¦ + C keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-71
Icon Edit Initial Screen

The icon edit initial screen (See Figure 4-71) shows the existing icons arranged
alphabetically in a list box.

4-67
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• A vertical scroll bar appears on the right hand side of the list box to scroll
to icons that are not seen initially due to space limitations.
• Below the list box, a text description of each icon appears for the icon
selected in the text box.
• The image for the selected icon should appear in the upper right portion of
the screen.
The Edit button is used to edit an existing icon. However, the NCCG supplied set
of standard icons cannot be edited. This is why the Edit button appears grayed
out if any of the standard icons are selected.
The Create button is used to create a new icon. The Delete button is used to
delete an existing icon. The standard set of icons cannot be deleted. The Done
button is used to exit this window and return to the Setup window.
To create a new icon, click on the CREATE button. This brings up the following
window:

Figure 4-72
Create a New Icon Window

The New Icon window contains edit boxes for a Reference, File Name, and
Description.
• The Reference is the name that the icon editor shows in the list box
referring to the icon.
• The File Name that appears is a default file name that is guaranteed to be
unique. However, this can be edited to any file name that isn’t already
used. Note that all icons have a .BMP extension.
• The Description is the text note that appears in the Description box in the
icon edit initial screen.
NOTE: All of the above information must be provided in order for the icon
to properly appear in the icon reference window.

4-68
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-73
Creating a New Icon

Figure 4-73 is an example of adding an icon for a Heat Detector - Rate of Rise.
The Reference and Description boxes have been filled out. The File Name was
changed from the default file name IC9U0JQM.BMP (Refer to Figure 4-72) to
HEATROR.BMP, a recognizable name. The default file name could have been
used, but using a name that assists in understanding what a bitmap file contains
is more helpful. The case of characters entered is not important. The Find button
is provided for looking at the existing file names and other drives and directories,
if desired.
The Copy button allows the user to create a new icon from an existing icon
instead of having to start from scratch. Using the Copy button brings up the Copy
File dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-74. Enter the source file name to be copied
and the destination file name or use the Find buttons to select the file source or
destinations desired. Once the desired source and destination are selected,
press the Copy button. As the copy is being generated, the bar graph shows the
progress with 100% indicating the file has been successfully copied.

Figure 4-74
Copy File Dialog Box

Figure 4-75 shows the Copy File entries for a rate of rise heat detector. In this
example, the bitmap HEATROR.BMP was created from the existing bitmap file
ROOF.BMP. The bar graph indicates the transfer was 100% complete. The Done
button brings the user back to the New Icon window (Refer to Figure 4-72).

4-69
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 4-75
Using the Copy File

The Draw Icon button in the New Icon window starts the graphic icon editor with
a blank icon. The Cancel button provides a pullout exit.
If Edit had been chosen for the existing icon shown in Figure 4-71, then the
dialog box shown in Figure 4-76 would appear. Notice the dialog box is titled Edit
Icon or Description. Only the description field of this dialog box can be edited.
To change the file name assignment of an icon, the icon must be deleted and a
new icon created with a new file name. When the Draw Icon button is selected,
the current bitmap file opens in the Icon Editor screen.

Figure 4-76
Edit Icon or Description Window

The size of all icons is 32 x 32 pixels. The default background color is pink. We
recommend using pink as the background color because it is interpreted as
transparent when used on an image. Being transparent allows the drawing the
icon is placed on to show through.
The actual size of the icon is shown above the editing area. Editing is performed
by clicking the mouse (left mouse button) on a color and moving the mouse to a
location on the image and clicking where you wish to paint that color. Each block
represents a pixel on the image. Multiple pixels can be painted by holding the
mouse button down and moving the mouse. Select pink to erase erroneously
painted locations.

4-70
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-77
Icon Editor

The Icon Editor has the following menu commands to assist in editing the icons:
File, Edit, View, Image, Options, and Help
The File menu allows the user to start new bitmap data, open other existing
bitmaps, or save a file. Do not use the Save As function because there is no link
to the icon in this mode. If you wish to change a file name, make the change in
the new icon screen.
The Edit menu is useful for cutting, copying, and pasting parts of the bitmap,
especially if any pattern is to be repeated. The select all item selects the entire
image. To select part of an image, draw a marquis box around the desired area
using either of the first 2 tools on the top of the tool bar. Use the undo item to
undo the last keystroke.
The View menu allows the user to change the magnification of the image. This
can also be changed by using the magnifying lens on the tool bar to toggle from
the small view to the large view. A grid display which clearly shows the pixels in
the bitmap can be displayed after selecting the custom size option by pressing
the § + G keys.
The Image menu allows the user to flip/rotate and stretch/skew the entire image.
It is also possible to invert colors, change attributes, or clear the image. It is
recommended that these settings not be changed. Use the tools in this menu
with caution, being sure not to change the size of the icon from 32 x 32 pixels and
the background color from pink.
The Options menu allows the user to change colors and create additional colors.
The edit color selection allows for the creation of a new color instead of the
currently selected color by using variable amounts of Red, Green, and Blue (RGB).
Note that the color pink used as transparent is made from the following setting: Red
= 255, Blue = 255, Green = 0. Any variance from these values will not be transpar-
ent. The draw transparent selection in the pull down menu is not functional.

4-71
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Use the File menu to save a file when editing is done. Then exit the Icon Editor
by clicking on the ⌧ (close box) in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
This brings up the Edit Icon or Description window (see Figure 4-78). Click the
UPDATE button to update the icon information in the data base.

Figure 4-78
Edit Icon Or Description Window

Confirm the icon is correct by selecting this new icon in the Icon Edit Screen
(Figure 4-79). Check that the icon that appears is the icon you have just created.

Figure 4-79
Checking the Icon Edit Screen

The new icon now appears in the Device Edit Icon list and can be assigned to a
device. Refer to pages 4-38 – 4-43 in this Chapter for further information.

4-72
Chapter 4 Configuration

System Sounds

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Sounds button, or


 Press the ¦ + U keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-80
Master Sound Level Control

To adjust the level of ALL sounds at the same time, either click the - and + buttons
or click and hold the dial while moving your pointer arrow around to the left (less
volume) or right (more volume). NOTE: The local speaker cannot be turned off.
To modify individual sounds, click the System Sounds tab. The following window
pops up:

Figure 4-81
SystemSoundsTab
4-73
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

In this NCC version, you can assign sounds to seven pre-determined events:
• Alarm Events
• Security Events
• Supervisory Events
• Trouble Events
• Trouble Events Still Unacknowledged
• Trouble Events Ignored
• System Ready

Select an event that you wish to modify and click the EDIT button. The following
window pops up:

Figure 4-82
Individual Sound Edit Window

• Browse - Click this button to look for a sound (a *.wav file) that you want
to assign to this event.
• Test - Click this button to play the sound (*.wav file) that currently shows
in the window.
• Stop - Click this button to stop playing the sound (*.wav file) that you were
testing.
• Pause Time - Choose the internal (in milliseconds) between the repeats of
the sound (*.wav file).
• Repeats - Choose the number of times that the sound (*.wav file) will play
in succession. Note: 0 = Infinity and any positive non-zero number limits
the number of time that the sound (*.wav file) repeats.
• Volume - Adjust the level of the sound, either by clicking the - and +
buttons or by clicking and holding the dial while moving your pointer arrow
around to the left (less volume) or right (more volume).

4-74
Chapter 4 Configuration

System Data Base Backup and Restore - Save


To begin saving NCCG configuration data to a diskette:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Save button, or


 Press the ¦ + a keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-83
Save System Files Window

Insert a diskette into the drive specified as the default archive drive in the System
Setting Window (refer to Systems Settings Window on page 4-4).

 Click on the Start button, or  Press the ¦ + S keys to


backup the system configuration to default drive specified.

4-75
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The backup process erases all the original contents of a diskette. If the diskette
contains files that are not part of the NCCG system, the system will display a
warning message. You must answer Yes after changing the diskette or deciding
to overwrite the contents of the diskette. If the diskette contains valid NCCG files
from a previous backup, the system will display a warning message including the
date on which the backup was performed. You must decide to either change the
diskette or overwrite the contents.
NOTE: In order for the backup to include the graphic image database,
you must check the Backup/Restore All Source Images option.
• Backup/Extract all diagnostic event files: If selected, this option will
allow you to backup all the diagnostic files (*.evt)
• Create Backup Using OS/2 Format: If selected, this will create a
backup using the old OS/2 pack format.
• Migrate All Files To Current Default Directories: This causes all of the
image and icon files to be saved with relative directory paths, which strips
off drive letters.
The progress graphic during backup illustrates the % Total Complete, % File
Complete and % Disk Used. When the first diskette is full, you will be prompted
for a new diskette. The entire process usually requires at least three floppy
diskettes.
NOTE: We recommend that you make a backup after any major
modifications to the system data.

CD-RW Control
NOTE: NCC supports Easy CD Creator 5.01 (NT and XP users) and
Roxio Easy Media Creator 9 (XP users only).
The following section is for the users of Easy CD Creator 5.01:
• Eject CD: Provides a means to eject the CD from the NCC.
• Format CD: This button will bring up the Roxio Easy CD Creator
DirectCD format utility window that will allow you to format the CD. Note:
Easy CD Creator 5.01 Basic is required to be able to write CDs. The
NCC uses the Roxio’s DirectCD feature to write to CDs. This feature
requires that the CD be formatted first. Use the format CD button on this
window to format the CD (see Figure 4-84).

4-76
Chapter 4 Configuration

Figure 4-84
DirectCD Format Utility - Format CD
Enter a label for the CD when prompted. When the CD is ready, the CD info area
of the DirectCD format utility window indicates the status of the CD as "ready for
reading and writing" (see Figure 4-85). Then a CD Ready window appears (see
Figure 4-86). Click OK to close this window.

Figure 4-85
DirectCD Format Utility - After A Format CD

Figure 4-86
DirectCD Format Utility - CD Ready

4-77
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Once the CD is ready, a database save or history archive can be saved to this
CD. Close the DirectCD format utility window by clicking on the "X" in the upper
right corner. This should return focus to the Save System Files Window as in
Figure 4-83. Use the Start button to save the system database or use the Done
button to exit.
When the CD is ready to be ejected, an Eject Options window will appear (see
Figure 4-87). It will appear whether the CD is ejected through the NCC or with
the button on the CD writer. Choose either to continue using DirectCD or to close
DirectCD and finish the process. If no more data is to be stored on the disk, it
can be closed.

Figure 4-87
DirectCD Format Utility - Eject CD

The following section is for the users of Roxio Easy Media Creator 9 (XP only):
NOTE: Roxio Easy Media Creator 9 does not display the Direct CD
window when you Format or Eject a CD.
When you click the Format CD button in the Save System Files Window (refer to
Figure 4-83), the following window pops up:

Figure 4-88
Roxio Easy Media Creator 9 - Format CD

4-78
Chapter 4 Configuration

After inserting a blank CD in the CD drive, click the OK button to start the format.

To eject a CD, click the Eject CD button in the Save System Files Window (refer
to Figure 4-83). This will eject the CD without displaying the Direct CD window.

Exiting without Saving


From the Save System Files to Drive A: window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + d keys.

System Data Base Backup and Restore - Load


To begin restoring NCCG configuration data from backup diskettes cre-
ated using the Save command:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + s keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Load button, or


 Press the ¦ + l keys.

4-79
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The following window pops up:

Figure 4-89
Load System Parameters Window

NOTE: If you want to include the graphic images in the restoration


process, click on Backup/Restore All Source Images.
• Backup/Extract all diagnostic event files: If selected, this option will
allow you to backup all the diagnostic files (*.evt)
• Create Backup Using OS/2 Format: If selected, this will load a backup
using the OS/2 unpack format.
• Migrate All Files to Current Default Directories: This causes all of the
image and icon files to be loaded with relative directory paths, which strips
off drive letters.
Note: The CD-RW Control buttons work exactly the same as in the System Data
Base Backup Save.

Insert a diskette into the appropriate drive.

 Click on the Start button, or  Press the ¦ + S keys to


back up the system configuration to floppy diskettes.
When you insert the first diskette, the system will check to be sure that this is the
first diskette of valid backup. If it is not, the system will reject the diskette. Once a
diskette’s contents have been restored, the system will prompt you to insert the
next diskette.
If the diskettes do not restore properly, as indicated by error messages, or you
abort the process, the system files may be compromised.

4-80
Chapter 4 Configuration

Do not operate the system until a full set of files has been successfully restored.
Note that the enable and disable status of the system, at time of backup, will also
be restored. We advise you to reset the system and obtain a list of disabled
devices (See the RESet Command, Chapter 6).

Exiting without Loading


From the Load System Parameters from Drive A: window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + d keys.


System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/Zeus Import
To begin Importing a CSG-M configuration file from diskette:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the CSG/Zeus Import button, or


 Press the ¦ + g keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-90
Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration Window

4-81
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Node: Select the node that corresponds to the configuration.


• Import All: Select this option to load all configuration information at once.
• Configuration: Enter the configuration name or use the default provided.
• Source: Select the source drive where the configuration is contained.

Insert the diskette containing the CSG-M or Zeus configuration file into the A: drive.

 Click on the Import button, or  Press the ¦ + i keys


to begin importing the CSG-M or Zeus configuration files.

Exiting without Saving


From the Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration window:

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + d keys.


Changing a Device State
To query or change the state of a device:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Device button, or


 Press the ¦ + V keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 4-91
Change a Device State Window (With Component)

4-82
Chapter 4 Configuration

• Node: Select the address number of the node (between 1 and 255) in
which the device is located by clicking the small up and down arrows.
(The large up and down arrows jump to the next or previous node in the
database.)
With the NCC-GL, the arrows will allow the user to go past the node
capacity, however no text will appear. The NCC-GL will not recognize any
node count beyond 2.
• Module: Select the address number of the module (between 1 - 254) in
which the device is located by clicking the up and down arrows. (The
small arrows move through all the numbers between 1 and 254 in chrono-
logical order. The large arrows move through numbers representing
installed modules in chronological order.)

Figure 4-92
Change a Device State Window (With Sub-Module)

• Device: Select the address number of the device (between 1 - 254) by


clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move through all the
numbers between 1 and 254 in chronological order. The large arrows
move through numbers representing installed devices in chronological
order.)
• Component: Select the address number of the component (between
1 - 7) by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move
through all the numbers between 1 and 7 in chronological order. The large
arrows move through numbers representing installed components in
chronological order.) The sub-module checkbox should be unchecked to
select a component. Refer to Figure 4-91.
• Sub-Module: Select the address number of the sub-module (between
1 - 127) by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move
through all the numbers between 1 and 127 in chronological order. The
large arrows move through numbers representing installed components in
chronological order.) The sub-module checkbox should be checked to
select a component. Note: When you select Sub-Module, the device
range will be between 1-31. (Refer to Figure 4-92.)

4-83
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Input Control: Choose one of the following -


- Enable Input
- Disable Input
- No Change
• Output Control: Choose one of the following -
- Enable Output
- Disable Output
If disabled (disarmed), select one of the following -
Energize (on)
De-Energize (off)
No Change
- No Change
Then, click on one of the following buttons:
• Do and Exit: Sends the changes to the device and exits this window.
• Do It: Sends the selected changes to the device, but does not exit this
window.
• Exit: Exits this window without sending a system command.
• Help: Displays a windows Help window with a description of device
control

4-84
Chapter 5 Operation

5 Operation
Logging On
To log onto the system from the main operator display,

 click on the LOG ON button in the vertical button array on the right side
of the screen, or

 Press the › key.


One of three windows pops up:
• Enter Password Window (For Password Only)
• Enter Password Window (For Logon and Password)
• Touch screen keyboard, as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6.

Type in your logon name (if required) and password.

 click on the Ok button, or  Press the ¦ + o keys.


If your name and password are correct, the system gives you access at your
assigned password level and displays the level on the status line. If your name
and password are not correct, the system denies you access and you must log
on again. Refer to pages 4-15 – 4-16 for more information about security levels.

Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2


Enter Password Window - Password Enter Password Window - Logon
Only and Password

Click on the Info button to bring up a Product Information Window with an Instal-
lation ID (refer to Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3
Product Information Window
5-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Logging Off
To log off the system from the main operator display,

 click on the LOG ON button in the vertical button array on the right side
of the screen, or

 Press the › key.


One of three windows pops up:
• Enter Password Window (For Password Only)
• Enter Password Window (For Logon and Password)
• Touch screen keyboard, as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6.
Type in your logon name (if required) and password.

 click on the LOGOUT button, or  Press the ¦ + l keys.


If your name and password are correct, the system will log you off and the level
section on the status line will display an asterisk (*). If your name and password
are not correct, you will remain logged on and you must log off again.

Acknowledging Events and Audibles

ACK
When there are active events, the ACK button on the top right
of the screen flashes to indicate that an acknowledgment is
required (See Figure 5-4). The button operates differently
depending on the configuration of the system as explained
below:
• NFPA 72 Local - Highrise. The ACK button label
changes to indicate the highest priority event queue.
1st Priority: ALARM (displayed in red)
2nd Priority: SUPERVISORY (displayed in blue)
3rd Priority: SECURITY (displayed in magenta)
4th Priority: TROUBLE (displayed in yellow)
For example, if there are alarms active, the label on the
button will turn bright red and display “ALR-ACK”. When
the button is pressed all existing unacknowledged
alarms are acknowledged at once and the name of the
next highest queue is shown in the ACK button.
The acknowledgment takes place at both the NCCG
and the local MXL which caused the event. Figure 5-4
Button Array

5-2
Chapter 5 Operation

NOTE: The acknowledgment is displayed on the NCCG’s Monitor in the


alarm list window as well as on the connected logging printer.
• NFPA 72 Local - Campus. The ACK button silences only the audible
signal from the NCCG and only has display capabilities. Functions not
allowed under this configuration are displayed as lightly colored buttons.
If any of the events in the display queue were generated by the NCCG
(such as, NCCG configuration errors, printer errors, etc.), then they may
be acknowledged by the appropriate command.
• NFPA 72 Proprietary. The “ACK” button causes only the most recent
unacknowledged event in the event queue to be acknowledged and each
event must be individually acknowledged.

 You may also press the ’ key to acknowledge an event.


NOTE: NFPA configurations do not apply to the NCC-GL. NCC-GL does not
support (XNET) network.

SILENCE
The SILENCE button, located just below the ACK button, or the “
key
changes the state of the selected MXL/XLS system’s silenceable audible devices
and toggles between “SILENCE” and “UNSILENCE” (See Figure 5-4).
NOTE: This command has no effect in a NFPA 72 Local - Campus system.

RESET
The RESET button or the œ key is used to reset the system when all events are
acknowledged, all audible devices are silenced and all queue information is
printed. It causes the whole system to reset just as if it had been reset from the
MKB/PMI. In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus system, this command has no system-
wide effect because it only resets the NCCG.

Event Display and Acknowledgement UL864 9th Edition


The event display has changed for the UL864 9th Edition. For the 9th edition, the
oldest (in contrast to the newest) highest priority events will be at the top as the
default.
The new queue priority order is:
Alarm
Supervisory
Security
Trouble
Securities are now above troubles. INs for an event appear before the OUTs.
This new order of events is reflected on the display when the UL864 9th Edition
queue priority is on.

5-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The display of unacknowledged events is also changed for the 9th edition. The
top priority unacknowledged event appears at the top of the event display, as it
did before this option existed. However, other unacknowledged events do not
appear below this event. They display sorted in with the acknowledged events, in
order of arrival. This was done to prevent the bumping of acknowledged events
off the screen as new unacknowledged events came in.
As each event is acknowledged, the remaining unacknowledged events will shift
in turn to the top.

Viewing Events in the Graphics Window

ZOOM IN
This button or the ” key allows the operator to get a closer look at the location
in alarm by displaying the appropriate map from the graphics data base. This
button only affects the GRAPHIC WINDOW.
NOTE: The graphic assignments are usually made during configuration.
For a CAD graphic, the way "Zoom In" works depends on the configuration:
• If the CAD drawing is one of the configured zooming levels, "Zoom In" will
display the next image level, regardless of whether it is CAD or bitmap.
• If the CAD drawing is configured as the last zooming level or the only
zooming level, "Zoom In" will zoom in the CAD drawing to a predefined
maximum zooming level.

ZOOM OUT
This button or the • key returns the graphic display to the previous zoom level.
For a CAD graphic, the way "Zoom Out" works depends on the configuration:
• If the CAD drawing is one of the configured zooming levels, "Zoom Out" will
display the previous image level, regardless of whether it is CAD or bitmap.
• If the CAD drawing is configured as the only zooming level or was zoomed in
by the CAD zooming engine, "Zoom Out" will zoom out the CAD drawing to a
predefined minimum zooming level.

NEXT
This button or the –key highlights the next text event and displays its corre-
sponding graphic in the graphic window.

PREV
This button or the —
key highlights the previous text event and displays its
corresponding graphic in the graphic window.

5-4
Chapter 5 Operation

Displaying Event Information - System


The SHOW button or the ˜ key allows the operator to display lists of informa-
tion about the current state of the system. When either of these buttons is
pressed, the following window pops up:

Figure 5-5
Show or Print System Information Window

If the Show dialog box (Figure 5-5) becomes unhighlighted or appears inactive
during operation, press the ² key.
ALARMS
To view or print a list of current system-wide alarms,

 Click on the Alarms button, or


 Press the ¦ + a keys.
The following window pops up:

ALARM IN-LC 03:002-002 5-Aug-96 15:49:20 Front Lobby

Figure 5-6
List of Devices in Alarm Window

5-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

SUPERVISORY
To view or print a list of current global supervisory events,

 Click on the Supervisory button, or


 Press the ¦ + s keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-7
List of Supervisory States Window

The events in the supervisory queue are displayed on the NCCG in the same
format as the List Supervisory print item in the MXL/XLS menu.

SECURITY
To view or print a list of current security events,

 Click on the Security button, or


 Press the ¦ + e keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-8
List of Security States Window

The events in the security queue display on the NCCG’s screen in the same
format as the List Security print item in the MXL/XLS menu.

5-6
Chapter 5 Operation

TROUBLES
To view or print a list of troubles,

 Click on the Troubles button, or


 Press the ¦ + t keys.
The following window pops up:

TROUBLE IN-RM 03:253 3-Aug-05 04:33:36 Warm Reset


TROUBLE IN-RM 03:006 5-Aug-05 09:42:28 Module Not Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:015 5-Aug-05 09:42:28 Unspecified Mod. Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:028 5-Aug-05 09:42:28 Unspecified Mod. Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:007 5-Aug-05 09:42:29 Module Comm. Failure, PSR
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:016-008 5-Aug-05 09:43:16 Unspecified Node Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:001-001 5-Aug-05 09:44:17 Input Device Not Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:016-001 5-Aug-05 09:44:33 Node Not Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:016-002 5-Aug-05 09:44:33 Node Not Responding
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:253 5-Aug-05 10:32:45 Battery Fuse/Wiring Open
TROUBLE IN-RM 03:016-006 5-Aug-05 10:35:37 Node Not Responding

Figure 5-9
List of Troubles Window

The events in the trouble queue are displayed on the NCCG’s screen in the same
format as the List Trouble print item in the MXL/XLS menu.

STATUS
To view or print a list of the current status points in the system,

 Click on the Status button, or


 Press the ¦ + O keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-10
List of Status Points Window

5-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

DISABLED
To view or print a list of disabled devices,

 Click on the Disabled button, or


 Press the ¦ + i keys.
The following window pops up:

TROUBLE IN 03:001-006 Relay Disarmed 1st Floor Conference Room

Figure 5-11
List of Disabled Devices for Node Window

ANALOG
To view or print the analog voltages of a particular device,

 Click on the Analog button, or


 Press the ¦ + L key.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-12
Show Analog Voltages for Module Window

5-8
Chapter 5 Operation

Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

Figure 5-13
List of Analog Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window

THRESHOLD
To view or print the current threshold voltages of a particular device,

 Click on the Threshold button, or


 Press the ¦ + H key.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-14
Show Threshold Voltages for Module Window

5-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

Threshold Voltages for 3:1


Ver 11 ALD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: ND 5.125 4.875 4.875 ND ND ND ND ND 4.750
10: 4.750 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
20: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
30: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
40: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
50: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Figure 5-15
List of Threshold Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window

SENSITIVITY
To view or print the sensitivity voltages of a particular device,

 Click on the Sensitivity button, or


 Press the ¦ + V keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-16
Show Sensitivity Voltages for Module Window

5-10
Chapter 5 Operation

Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

Sensitivity Voltages for 3:1


Ver 11 ALD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: ND 3.125 3.125 3.375 ND ND ND ND ND 2.875
10: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
20: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
30: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
40: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
50: ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Figure 5-17
List of Sensitivity Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window

MODULE TYPES
To view or print the modules on a particular node,

 Click on the Module Types button, or


 Press the ¦ + y keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-18
Show Module Types for Node Window

5-11
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Enter a node number and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

Figure 5-19
List of Module Types for Node Window

To view the firmware revisions for all the COM boards or modules (HUB-4, etc.)
on an NCC-WAN, enter the NCC node address and click on the DO IT button.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-20
List of Module Types and Firmware Revisions for an NCC

The firmware revisions include a Base Firmware (Base FW) and an Application
Firmware (Appl FW). For a HUB-4, it also shows the COM (1-4) port revision
firmware version. For boards not present in the system, but entered into the WAN
Components network map, 0.0.0 (0.0 for COM) will appear for the revisions. The
boards must be local and not remote on an NCC for this command to work.

5-12
Chapter 5 Operation

DEVICE TYPE
To view or print the device types connected to a particular module,

 Click on the Device Type button, or


 Press the ¦ + C keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-21
Show Device Types for Module Window

Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

1:No Pre-alarm, no ASD 2:ASD10 Enabled


3:East Wing 4:West Wing
5:Executive Office Suite 6:1st Floor Conference Room
7:2nd Floor Conference Room 8:Front Lobby
9:None 10:Loading Dock
11:Cafeteria 12:None
13:None 14:None
15:None 16:None
17:None 18:None
19:None 20:None
21:None 22:None
23:None 24:None
25:None 26:None

Figure 5-22
List of Device Types in a Given Module Window

5-13
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

MESSAGES
To view or print a list of the all messages associated with a particular module,

 Click on the Messages button, or


 Press the ¦ + m keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 5-23
Show Device Messages for Module Window

Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window
pops up:

1:Non Existing Device 2:Non Existing Device


3:ILI-1 Ion Detector 4:ID-60I Ionization Detector
5:TRI-2/60 Switch Input 6:TRI-2/60R Switch Input + Relay
7:TRI-2/60R Switch Input + Relay 8:TRI-2/60R Switch Input + Relay
9:None 10:ILP-1 Photo Detector
11:ILP-1 Photo Detector 12:None
13:None 14:None
15:None 16:None
17:None 18:None
19:None 20:None
21:None 22:None
23:None 24:None
25:None 26:None

Figure 5-24
List of Device Messages in a Given Module Window

5-14
Chapter 5 Operation

NODE STATUS
To view or print a list of the current status of the system,

 Click on the Status button, or  Press the ¦ + O keys.


The following window pops up:

Figure 5-25
List of Node Status Information Window

The node status lists all nodes for which the NCC has the configuration. The
configuration name (either CSGM or Zeus), version number (MMB or PMI ver-
sion), UL system type, and the event counts shows for each of the nodes.

DONE
To exit the SHOW dialog box and return to the main display,

 Click on the Done button, or  Press the ¦ + d keys.

Displaying Event Information - By Node


The status bar at the bottom of the screen is used to indicate the general state of
nodes attached to the NCCG. When a node button is pressed on the System
Node Status Bar the following window pops up:

Figure 5-26
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL)

5-15
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 5-27
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL on HUB-4)

Figure 5-28
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XLS)

Figure 5-29
System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XL3 on HUB-4)

• When the DISCONNECT button is pressed, the selected node is discon-


nected from the NCC.
• DISCONNECT and CONNECT buttons do not appear for HUB-4 con-
nected panels.
• Monitor button allows monitoring events of a panel.
• REQUEST button requests control of a panel from another NCC that has
control.
• XL3 panels do not show configuration information, as the NCC does not
import XL3 configurations.
• When the CONNECT button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar,
the following window pops up:

5-16
Chapter 5 Operation

Figure 5-30
Connect Node Window

• Press CONNECT to reconnect to the disconnected node.


• Press RELOAD and the NCC downloads the entire contents of the CSG/
Zeus of that node, regardless of any NCC settings or the NCC node.

If the Inhibit Multiple Reset Filter is selected (SETUP > SYSTEM > OPTIONS >
MORE) the following window pops up when the RESET button is pressed on the
System Node Status Bar when less than 2.5 minutes has elapsed after pressing
the DISCONNECT button:

Figure 5-31
Reset Operation Query Window

The Reset Operation Query window shows the amount of time remaining in the
reset operation. Level 'C' operators and higher can select to either Continue With
Reset or Cancel the operation.
• If Continue with Reset is selected, the system will complete the first reset
and then subsequently reset the system for each time the Reset button
has been pressed.
• If Cancel is selected, the system will complete the Reset procedure, but
will not continue with further resets.

5-17
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

When the SHOW button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar the following
window pops up:

Figure 5-32
Show or Print Node Information Window

Node information can be displayed for each of the following events:


• Alarms
• Supervisory
• Security
• Troubles
• Status
• Disabled
When each button is pressed, a window pops up displaying information in the
same format as described in Figures 5-5 – 5-11.

Local/Global Operation

General Description
Multiple NCCs within an XNETed system can be configured to allow each NCC
(local) to control only specific MXL/XL3/XLS panels, while a master NCC can
receive all panel conditions yet not be in control of any area. This form of opera-
tion has many uses, e.g., in large buildings or campuses where full visibility is
required at a single location but individual tenants control locally.
The Request, Grant, Deny Control feature further enhances the Local/Global
operation to allow the transfer of system control between NCCs, thereby main-
taining a single point of control over individual panels. For example, an operator
can Request Control of an MXL/XL3/XLS from the controlling NCC. This request
may be granted by the operator, denied, or control will be automatically granted
within 30 seconds should no one be at the granting location.

5-18
Chapter 5 Operation

General Limitations
The number of MXL and XLs panels that can connect to the NCC WAN through
XNET is 64, additional nodes from 64 to 128 can only be assigned any module
connected to the HNET. Further, all MXL/XL3/XLS panels must be addressed to
the network map of at least one NCC WAN, even if the MXL/XL3/XLS panels
spread out over both XNET and HNET (HUB-4) connections. There can be no
overlapping addresses (each address for the MXL/XL3/XLS must be
unique). ANY MXL or XL3 connected to the NCC via the HUB-4 will not support
panel to panel logic; however, MXL and XLS panels connected directly to XNET
will support panel to panel logic.

MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup


The node status bar normally displayed at the bottom of the NCC WAN VDT
screen indicates which MXL/XL3/XLS panels are being monitored or controlled
by an NCC WAN. However, with the Node Grouping Feature, the MXLs, XL3s
and XLSs can be configured with a single ICON to represent a group of panels.
There are no restrictions to how panels are grouped but usually it would be by
building or area. Additionally, MXL/XL3/XLS panels can be grouped by MXL/XLS
network (XNET) or connected through a HUB-4. On a multiple NCC system,
nodes can be grouped together regardless of where they are connected.
Grouping allows multiple MXL/XL3/XLS panels making up one building to be
referred to on the NCCG status bar as one entity. Acknowledging, displaying, and
printing of individual reports are unaffected by this grouping.
Group names must be the same in all NCCs if request, grant, deny control trans-
fer is to be used with groups. Watch use of upper and lower case characters, etc.
If a name is changed, exit out of a group edit and enter back in before adding or
deleting group members.

Figure 5-33
Network Node Map With Group Button

5-19
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Selecting the Group button in the network node map (See Figure 5-33) will bring
up the Group Setting window as shown in Figure 5-34.

Figure 5-34
Group Setting Window

To add a new group name, click the mouse on the Add button in the Group
Setting Window. This will bring up the Add a Group window shown in Figure 5-35.
Note that the group name is case sensitive.

Figure 5-35
Add A Group Window

Nodes can be added or deleted from a group by using the ADD and DELETE
buttons respectively. Refer to Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36
Edit A Group Node Map

5-20
Chapter 5 Operation

MXL/XLS Network Status Bar


As discussed in the MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup section, the node status
bar can represent either a single node and/or a group of MXL/XL3/XLS panels.
The button's background represents the three modes of operation of an individual
MXL/XL3/XLS and/or group (network) of MXL/XL3/XLS panels:
• White background indicates that this NCCG is monitoring that group.
(Details on Monitor Mode are outlined in the NCCG Monitor Mode section.)
• Gray background indicates that group is not being monitored or controlled
by this NCCG.
• Color backgrounds indicate control or command mode and follow the
same rules for an MXL/XL3/XLS node. (Details on Command Mode are
outlined in the NCCG Command Mode section.)
• Red indicates at least one alarm is active in that group.
• Yellow indicates at least one trouble is active in that group.
• Green indicates all panels in the group are normal.
• Other colors indicate supervisory, security, downloading CSG-M/Zeus,
synchronizing, etc.
• Text and graphics area of screen reflect the activity of the groups being
monitored.
A group button has a different appearance than a standard panel icon used on a
node button.

Manipulating MXL, XL3 and XLS Groups


Clicking the group button on the status bar brings up the group dialog box. Refer
to Figure 5-37.

Figure 5-37
Group Dialog Box

The group dialog box contains the following elements:


• Window title with the name of the group.
• Name of group and number of MXL/XL3/XLS panels.
• The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories, and securities for the
group.

5-21
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

• Five operational buttons to allow:


• Monitor mode: Allows this NCC to monitor this group of MXL/XL3/XLSs.
[Note: If this NCC is in control (command mode), clicking this option is
ignored.] Should this NCC be in the Monitor Mode, the button is re-
labeled as Monitor Off. This allows the user the ability to switch back
and forth.
• Request for control or command of a group (see Local/Global operation).
• Reset connected panels (global) for all members of that group.
• Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of
a group. These can be directed to a printer if desired.
• Details: This button is used to show the node status toolbar for all mem-
bers of the group. The node status bar, as shown in Figure 5-38, will
appear floating so that it is not confused with the group status toolbar.
This button, when clicked again, will toggle the node status bar off.

Figure 5-38
Node Status Toolbar

Individual Node buttons will appear for panels that are not assigned to a group.
When the individual panel/node button is depressed, the node dialog box will
appear (See Figure 5-39). The additional buttons on the dialog box are Monitor
(to switch monitor mode on and off) and Request (to request control). These
buttons will work the same as for a group except they will pertain to only that
node. These buttons will not appear for a system with only one NCC.

Figure 5-39
Node Dialog Box

5-22
Chapter 5 Operation

Monitor Mode
A white background on the node or group status ICON indicates that node or
group is in monitor mode. In this mode, no control is allowed or acknowledgment
required. However, the NCC WAN is able to show the activity from that monitored
group with respect to the text events and graphics areas. Listing or Show com-
mands are also operational.
Monitor mode can be turned off manually for a group or node by clicking the node
or group status bar button and using the Monitor Off button.
Figure 5-40 is an example of an NCC WAN group status line in monitor mode for
the last group. The colored frame around the outside of the group status button
indicates the current state of that group.

Figure 5-40
NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Monitor Mode

Color backgrounds indicate control or command mode and follow the same rules
for an MXL, XL3 or XLS node. (Details on Command Mode are outlined in the
NCC Command Mode section.)
• Red indicates at least one alarm in that group.
• Yellow indicates at least one trouble in that group.
• Green indicates all panels in the group are normal.
• Other colors indicate supervisory, security, downloading CSG-M/Zeus,
synchronizing, etc.
• Text and graphics area of screen reflect the activity of the groups being
monitored.

Control Mode
A colored background on the node or group status bar button indicates that node
or group is in control mode. The text event and graphics areas of the NCC WAN
reflect the activity of the groups or nodes in control mode. Acknowledgement is
required and control is allowed.
A mix of monitoring mode and control mode is allowed in an NCC. For monitored
nodes, commands other than list commands do not go to the panel.
Figure 5-41 shows an example of an NCC WAN group status line with the last
group in control mode. Control mode of a group or node cannot be thrown to
another NCC WAN. Someone at that NCC WAN must request the group or node.
Refer to the Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control section for details on trans-
ferring control.

Figure 5-41
NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Control Mode
5-23
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Full System Control


The following buttons are on the MORE commands screen: SUMMARY and
FULL SYSTEM CONTROL.
FULL SYSTEM CONTROL has the following features:
• Is password protected as configured in the More-Setup-System-Logon-
Security Level-Full Control command.
• Provides an ARE YOU SURE message box with OKAY and CANCEL
buttons to allow pullout for errant press of the buttons.
• Allows an authorized user to obtain full control without having to request it.

Summary Screen Showing Where Control Lies


A summary screen showing where control lies on each group can be brought up
from the MORE command’s dialog box by clicking the SUMMARY button. This
screen will show for all groups and all MX/XL3/XLS nodes for which NCC WAN
has control of each specific remote panel. The text referring to the NCC WAN in
control will be the node name and custom message.

WAIO System Node Button


If you have a WAIO system configured in NCC, one or more WAIO nodes will be
displayed on the system node status bar as shown in Figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42
System Node Status Bar - With WAIO

Clicking the WAIO button on the status bar brings up the WAIO dialog box. Refer
to Figure 5-43.

Figure 5-43
WAIO Dialog Box

The WAIO dialog box contains the following elements:


• Window title with the node ID.
• Number of WAIOs and MUXs (future use) configured in this WAIO system.
• The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories and securities for this
WAIO system.

5-24
Chapter 5 Operation

• Three operational buttons to allow:


• Reset connected WAIOs and MUXs (future use) for this WAIO system.
• Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of
this WAIO. These can be directed to a printer if desired.
• Details: This button is used to show a matrix with all configured WAIO
nodes for this particular WAIO system. The matrix, as shown in Figure
5-44, will appear floating so that it is not confused with the WAIO Dialog
Box and the Node Status Bar. This button, when clicked again, will
toggle the matrix window off.

Figure 5-44
Matrix Showing Configured WAIO Nodes

Each button in this matrix represents one WAIO node with a maximum of 96
WAIO nodes in one WAIO system. The color of each button indicates its status.
• Pale Gray - indicates a non-configured WAIO
• "X" - indicates a configured, but disconnected WAIO
• Red/Yellow/Green - indicates Alarm/Trouble/No Events

Clicking on any one of the buttons brings up a WAIO Module Dialog Box as
shown below:

Figure 5-45
WAIO Module Dialog Box

5-25
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The WAIO dialog box contains the following elements:


• Window title with the WAIO ID and the WAIO system node ID.
• The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories, and securities for this
WAIO.
• Two operational buttons to allow:
• Reset connected WAIO is there is a configured reset as the output.
• Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of
this WAIO. These can be directed to a printer if desired.

Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control


Control cannot be transferred to an NCC WAN. It must be requested away from
an NCC WAN that already has control of the fire panel. A time-out feature will
transfer control of an NCC WAN that loses communications while it has control.
Refer to the previous section.
Control is requested by selecting the group's status bar button. On the dialog box
that appears, click the Request button to bring up a Command Request dialog
box (Figure 5-46).

Figure 5-46
Command Request Dialog Box

The Command Request dialog box shows the following:


• Group requesting command to confirm it is correct.
• A countdown timer that shows in seconds when automatic control will be
granted.
• A Cancel button is provided to pull out of a request, if desired.

5-26
Chapter 5 Operation

Figure 5-47
Attention - Command Requested Dialog Box

A status message will appear at the NCC WAN having control: “Attention - Com-
mand Has Been Requested” (Figure 5-47). This dialog box will show the group
that control is requested for and which NCC requested it. The user has a choice
of Granting or Denying Control. Lack of a response will cause the countdown
timer to take control automatically (See next section).
The command request dialog box (Figure 5-46) will remove itself when command
mode is granted or in the event of a time-out (30 seconds). The requesting NCC
WAN will then enter command mode for this group. The group status toolbar and
the text and graphic areas will reflect the current state of the group. Monitor mode
will be removed from any other group and the background of the group status
toolbar will go gray to reflect this.

Countdown Timer for Automatic Transfer of Control


The countdown timer for automatic transfer of control allows control of a group to
be obtained whether or not someone is present at the controlling NCC WAN and
whether or not the controlling NCC WAN is communicating. In any case, control
must be requested first. Control will not automatically be transfered to an NCC
WAN unless someone at that location requests the control. The countdown time
is 30 seconds.

Loss of Control Handling and Notification


When the NCC WAN loses control of a group, the group acts as though it lost its
own local NCC WAN. Network failures (“Network Disabled”) are reported by the
NCC WAN losing control, telling the user that loss of a connection has occurred.
For NFPA 72 Local - Highrise it will allow MXL and XLS panels to gain control
through the MKBs and PMIs. All MXL and XLS panels in the group will report
“Node Not Responding” troubles for the missing NCC WAN.

5-27
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NCC WAN Database Synchronization


Data entered into one NCC WAN can be transferred to any other NCC WAN by
the backup and restore command to a floppy disk. After a database exchange,
the network settings node map must be renamed to correctly identify the “This
Unit” and the type of NCC WAN node where the database is installed.
The database exchange is completed in the following manner:
1. Save a database on one NCC WAN through the MORE - SETUP - SAVE
system database backup and restore command feature.
2. Take this saved database to another NCC WAN and restore the database on
this NCC WAN by using the MORE – SET UP – LOAD system database
backup and restore command feature.

Logging Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode


The logging printer will only log events for nodes or groups for which this specific
NCC has control. All local NCC WAN commands are logged to and reports
generated by any commands steered to the report printer. The logging printer
must be enabled for all proprietary-configured systems.

Report and Graphics Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode


Report and graphics printing, if enabled in system options, will exist for an NCC
WAN whether it is in control mode or in monitor mode. However, if neither of
these modes is enabled for a group or node, executing commands that generate
reports or graphic printouts will not be allowed.
There are two new selections on the Printers Setup Screen. The first is "Fit to
Page" for large format graphics printers. The second is "Enable Independent
Report Printer Only" which is used to set up a printer dedicated to printing re-
ports. (Refer to Figure 5-48.)

Event and Command History (Global with Filter by Group)


Event and command history will be kept on a global basis. Each NCC WAN
records all events despite its display mode and all events will be logged into the
local history file. Command requests will also be logged into local history identify-
ing the user and the NCC WAN where the command was performed.

5-28
Chapter 5 Operation

Figure 5-48
Printers Setup Screen

History Data Conversion to Comma Delimited Text File


An option is provided in "Generate History File Reports" to output a comma delim-
ited text file to the hard drive. The selection for this option is located in the MORE -
HISTORY - CREATE REPORT Files notebook page. The section titled "History
Report Destination" has a radio button with the selection External. By selecting
this option, the NCC will allow creation of a file in the \NCC2 directory. An autho-
rized user with the proper password can retrieve this file. (Note: The NCC WAN
must be shut down to provide access to the NT desktop for file retrieval.)

Color Pallet
This option provides the user with the ability to adjust/modify the color of the
ICON which represents the IN and OUT condition of an off-normal point. The
pallet, by design, allows the use of the full color spectrum available, based on the
video card and monitor. The color pallet can be found in the MORE - SETUP -
DISPLAY- COLOR MENU. (Note: Care must be taken when modifying the
default colors. The Alarm and Trouble colors, red and yellow respectively,
should be left at the factory default setting.)

Fly Over Comment


This feature of the NCC WAN System allows the operator to add comments to
an event by passing the mouse cursor over the event ICON located at the begin-
ning of the custom message at the far left of the screen. Once the cursor

5-29
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

changes to a question (?) mark, the operator can right click the mouse and a
pop-up screen is displayed allowing the following actions:
1. A comment can be added which will be printed and appended to the History
Log.
2. The point can be Armed or Disarmed by clicking on the proper radio button.

Also note that if the NCC Graphics option is in use, the same results can be
achieved by selecting the desired icon on the graphic map.

Display Node Name


To assist the operator in identifying a Node Location, a feature has been added
to allow the Node Name, as entered in the Node Setup Menu (MORE - SETUP -
NETWORK - NODE - DISPLAY - DISPLAY NODE NAME), to be displayed along
with the abnormal event. When this option is set, the Node Name will be dis-
played above the Time and Date of the off-normal point and the Node Address
(which is normally displayed in this location), will be moved below the condition
type on the far left of the message line. (Note: The default setting is node num-
ber only positioned above the time and date.)

Figure 5-49
Display Node Names

5-30
Chapter 5 Operation

Macro command scripts used on HUB-4 connected panels


Macro commands can be used on HUB-4 modem connected XL3 or MXL panels
in the same way as they are used to communicate with XNET connected MXL
panels. However, there are a few differences, as follows:

• The speed of a HUB-4 connected panel command response is not as fast


as an XNET connected panel, because the HUB-4 has a slower commu-
nication rate.
• The communication protocol can only handle one command at a time,
therefore the NCC has to wait for a panel response, which can take
seconds per device. XNET connected panels only wait for a communica-
tions ACK that comes within milliseconds.

Error messages are in the form of a pop up window showing a panel error re-
sponse. If, for any reason, an XL3 or MXL does not take a command, the type of
error response and the node number involved displays. An example error mes-
sage is shown below.

Figure 5-50
Error Message Pop Up Window

Disarms and arms generate the respective input or output disarmed “in” and “out”
troubles. They should be checked to confirm the desired devices were disarmed
and re-armed. This should be done for HUB-4 as well as XNET connected panels.

If a command can be performed as a manual command, it can be used in a macro.


Command script definition guidelines are found in the NCC manual in Appendix F.
However, some basic guidelines for macro commands are as follows:

• Name the macros U1 through U40 if the macros will be used as user
defined commands.

• Repeated commands – separate each command with a semi-colon. For


example: DIS/O 3:253-1; DIS/O 3:253-2; DIS/O 3:253-3; DIS/O 3:253-4;

5-31
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Appendix F shows an alternative way to construct a script by allowing the


grouping of up to 8 or 9 arguments per line. This will work for HUB-4
connected panels also. However, there will be no minimization of network
traffic or faster execution.

• Range commands – If points in the range do not exist in the CSGM


database for MXLs, an error message window appears stating that the
device is not in the database and that it will attempt the command any-
way. If the device does not exist in the MXL itself, a “function not imple-
mented” or similar error will appear for that node. An example of a range
command is as follows: DIS 3:1-1>5;

For HUB-4 connected nodes, the above command ends up being sent as
5 separate disarm commands. Each command waits for a “function
complete” response or error response from the XL3 or MXL.

Command Additions for NCC-WAN


XL3 devices can only be controlled from the Manual command. To arm, disarm,
and control XL3 devices, use the following commands:

• For XL3 POX Solid State (POX-SS) use the “O” modifier. The NCC-
WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning POX SS and allow
devices in the range 01-1 to 32-4. An example command for arming and
disarming a POX-SS device 01-1 on node 3 is as follows:

DIS/O 3:01-1
ENA/O 3:01-1

Note: The letter modifiers follow command modifiers used by XL3. There is ad-
dress overlap on XL3 output devices. This explains why the “O” is used for XL3 to
mean POX SS only and on MXL it means any output. The only XL3 devices that
can be armed or disarmed without a modifier are the input devices (INX).

• For XL3 POX Relay use the “R” modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this
modifier for an XL3 as meaning POX Relay and allow devices in the
range 01-1 to 32-4. An example command for arming and disarming a
POX Relay device 01-1 on node 3 is as follows:

DIS/R 3:01-1
ENA/R 3:01-1

5-32
Chapter 5 Operation

• For XL3 SPX Outputs use the “S” modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept
this modifier for an XL3 as meaning SPX Output signaling devices and
allow devices in the range 01-1 to 08-4. An example command for arming
and disarming a SPX Output 01-1 on node 3 is as follows:

DIS/S 3:01-1
ENA/S 3:01-1

• For XL3 Loop Disarm use the “L” modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this
modifier for an XL3 as meaning Loop Disarm and allow loop (or module)
addresses in the range 11 to 84. An example command for arming and
disarming a Loop Disarm of INX loop 11 on node 3 is as follows:

DIS/L 3:11
ENA/L 3:11

• For XL3 INX Addressable Relays use the “T” modifier. The NCC-WAN
will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning INX Addressable Relays
and allow devices in the range 11-01 to 84-30. An example command for
arming and disarming an INX Addressable Relay device 11-01 on node 3
is as follows:

DIS/T 3:11-01
ENA/T 3:11-01

• For XL3 INX Addressable Inputs use no modifier. The NCC-WAN will
accept this for an XL3 as meaning INX Addressable Inputs and allow
devices in the range 11-01 to 84-30. An example command for arming
and disarming an INX Addressable Input device 11-01 on node 3 is as
follows:

DIS 3:11-01
ENA 3:11-01

• For XL3 or MXL Node Disarm enter only the node number without a
colon. This will cause the node icon to appear with an X (as if not re-
sponding) and will cause an input disarmed trouble event “in” with the
node number address. This can be entered in the Change a Device State
menu as the node address with a module and device address of zero and
selecting either Disable Input (disarm) or Enable Input (rearm). Enter as a
manual command for node 3 as follows:

DIS 3
ENA 3

5-33
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Enabling a zone causes the node input disarm trouble event “out” which causes
the node to re-sync. Note: If this command is done for the only node on an XNET,
the trouble "XNET Network Disabled" will come in, as the NCC-WAN no longer
sees any XNET traffic. The “out” for this event will appear when the node is
rearmed.

For HUB-4 connected nodes, one or possibly two additional troubles are gener-
ated by disarming a node. The HUB-4 address and port the node is assigned to
will give an input disarmed “in” trouble. If there is a redundant HUB-4, it also will
report an input disarmed “in” trouble.

5-34
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

6 Manual Operation

The NCCG Manual Operation Command set is composed of three categories:


• Core Commands
• Fixed System Macro Commands
• User Defined Macro Commands

These functions can be accessed by using either a standard or a touch screen


keyboard. If you wish to use the touch screen keyboard, configure the NCCG
System Settings - Options Tab as described in Figures 4-4 and 4-5 on page 4-4.

Entering Core System Commands


To enter a core system command:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Manual button, or


 Press the ¦ + M key
If you have not selected the touch screen keyboard in the NCC-G System Set-
tings - Options tab, the following window pops up:

Figure 6-1
Manual Command Entry Window

6-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The Manual Command Entry window contains a drop down list of the last 20
manual commands issued. To access this drop down list, click on the end of the
command line and a scroll down list will appear. To activate one of the existing 20
manual commands, double click on the desired command and execute the
command by clicking Do It or Do It and Exit.
If you have selected the touch screen keyboard, the keyboard pops up as illus-
trated in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6.
Type the command and press Enter or Click on the OK button.

Core Commands
The following Core Commands are available in NCCG and are summarized in
table form in Appendix C:

ACKnowledge Command
This command is used by the operator to acknowledge an active event in the
system. The result of issuing this command varies, depending on the UL
system type selected.
COMMAND ACTION TAKEN
ACK/AX Acknowledge all alarms
ACK/TX Acknowledge all troubles
ACK/SX Acknowledge all supervisories
ACK/BX Acknowledge all securities
ACK/1 Acknowledge the top event

ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 LOCAL - HIGHRISE CONFIGURATION


In the highrise configuration, all of the block acknowledgment modes are avail-
able to the operator. Use the /X modifier to acknowledge all events of the se-
lected type. Individual acknowledgment of the highest event is still available to
the operator, although it is not required by code.
ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 LOCAL - CAMPUS CONFIGURATION
In the campus configuration, the operator does not directly acknowledge the
remote nodes (MXLs). Acknowledging the NCC-G only quiets the local audible
device in the PC and does not alter the display or remote nodes. There is no
special effect obtained by using any modifiers.
ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 PROPRIETARY CONFIGURATION
In the proprietary configuration, only the topmost event on the display is acknowl-
edged. Any attempt to block acknowledge is rejected.

6-2
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

DEEnergize Command
The De-energize command turns off an output device if that device was dis-
armed. De-energizing a device with this command has the same effect as per-
forming the operation at an MXL’s/XLS's annunciator control panel.
To de-energize an output device in MXL, type:
DEE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, DEE 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To de-energize an output device in XLS, type:
DEE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
DEE NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

DEVice Command
The Device command sets the sensitivity of any device in the system that has
variable sensitivity settings. (The DEVice command is not supported for WAIOs.)
To set the sensitivity, enter the DEV command along with the /S modifier, the
node/device address, and the sensitivity value you wish to set. In MXL type,
DEV/S NODE:MODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER]
(For example, DEV/S 33:005-13 H2 [ENTER])
The device settings to choose from are as follows:
H3 = High 3
H2 = High 2
H1 = High 1
N = Normal
L1 = Low 1
L2 = Low 2
L3 = Low 3
In XLS type,
DEV/S NODE:MODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER] or
DEV/S NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER]
The device settings to choose from are as follows:
H4 = 2.45%/foot
H3 = 2.59%/foot
H2 = 2.72%/foot
H1 = 2.86%/foot
N = 3.00%/foot
L1 = 3.13%/foot
L2 = 3.27%/foot
Individual device sensitivities, thresholds and analog voltages can be displayed
by using the MOD command outlined on page 6-7.

6-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

DISable Command
The Disable command can disarm an input or output device. When used with the
/N modifier, this operation disconnects an entire node.
DISARM A DEVICE
Disarming a device with this command has the same effect as performing
the operation at an MXL’s/XLS's annunciator control panel. Using this
command with the /O modifier disarms an output device.
To disarm an input device in MXL, type:
DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, DIS 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To disarm an input device in XLS, type:
DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
DIS NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

To disarm an output device in MXL, type:


DIS/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, DIS/O 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To disarm an output device in XLS, type:
DIS/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
DIS/O NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

DISARM A DEVICE WITH COMPONENT (XLS ONLY)


This form of disarm command uses the /C modifier and two letter
abbreviation for the component as follows:

Abbreviation Description
SM P2 Photo
TH P2 Thermal
NE P2 Neural
R1 P2 Relay 1
R2 P2 Relay 2
LD LE D
S1 Swi tch 1
S2 Swi tch 2
SL Status LED
CV Conventi onal zone

6-4
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

To disarm a device with component, type:


DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE^COMPONENT [ENTER]
(for example DIS 33 :005-013^2 [ENTER])
OR
DIS /C NODE:MODULE-DEVICE CC [ENTER]
Where CC is the component abbreviation from the table above
(for example DIS /C 33:005-013 R1 [ENTER])

DISCONNECT A NODE
This form of the Disable command, using the /N modifier, disconnects a
node from the network and allows its local annunciator to gain control.
While in the disconnect mode, both the remote node and the NCCG
display a trouble message indicating this state.
To disconnect a node, type:
DIS/N NODE [ENTER]
(For example, DIS/N 5 [ENTER])

ENAble Command
The Enable command can arm an input or output device. When used with the /N
modifier, this operation connects a previously disconnected node.
ARM A DEVICE
Arming a device with this command is functionally identical to performing
the operation at an MXL’s/XLS's annunciator control panel. Using this
command with the /O modifier arms an output device.
To arm an input device in MXL, type:
ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, ENA 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To arm an input device in XLS, type:
ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
ENA NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
To arm an output device in MXL, type:
ENA/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, ENA/O 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To arm an output device in XLS, type:
ENA/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
ENA/O NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

6-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

ENABLE A DEVICE WITH COMPONENT (XLS ONLY)


This form of enable command uses the /C modifier and two letter abbre-
viation for the component as follows:

Abbreviation Description
SM P2 Photo
TH P2 Thermal
NE P2 Neural
R1 P2 Relay 1
R2 P2 Relay 2
LD LE D
S1 Swi tch 1
S2 Swi tch 2
SL Status LED
CV Conventi onal zone

To enable a device with component, type:


ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE^COMPONENT [ENTER]
(for example ENA 33 :005-013^2 [ENTER])
OR
ENA /C NODE:MODULE-DEVICE CC [ENTER]
Where CC is the component abbreviation from the table above
(for example ENA /C 33:005-013 R1 [ENTER])

CONNECT A NODE
This form of the Enable command, using the /N modifier, connects a node
to the network and returns its local annunciator to its standby condition.
To connect a node, type:
ENA/N NODE [ENTER]
(For example, ENA/N 5 [ENTER])

CONNECT A NODE WITH AUTOMATIC DATABASE DOWNLOAD


This form of the Enable command, using the /N and /X modifiers, con-
nects a node to the network and forces a database download from the
node.
To connect a node with forced database download, type:
ENA/NX NODE [ENTER]

6-6
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

ENErgize Command
The Energize command turns on an output device if that device is disarmed.
Energizing a device with this command is the same as performing the operation
at an MXL’s/XLS's annunciator control panel.
To energize an output device in MXL, type:
ENE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]
(For example, ENE 33:005-13 [ENTER])
To energize an output device in XLS, type:
ENE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or
ENE NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

MODule Command
The Module command displays or prints information about a module and its
devices in the system. (The MODule command is not supported for WAIOs
because there are no analog devices to read on a WAIO.) The user can generate
the following reports by adding one of the indicated modifiers:

MODULE COMMANDS

Modifier Description

/A Analog voltages for all detectors attached to a module


/S Sensitivity for all detectors attached to a module
/T Thresholds for all detectors attached to a module
/C Device types
/M Messages for the devices in the module

/N CSG sensitivities for all devices in a module

The basic form of this command (MOD) generates the report in the command
window of the display. Using the L modifier in combination with any command
form generates a listing on the system printer. Note: Do Not repeat the "/" or add
any spaces between modifiers.
For example, to display all analog voltages that are on ALD loop 3 in MXL node 4,
the operator types the following command:
MOD/A 4:3 [ENTER]
To list all of the device messages from the same module on the system printer,
the operator types the following:
MOD/ML 4:3 [ENTER]
Any listing generated on the system printer begins with a heading that describes
the type of report. The listing ends with the phrase End of Listing printed at the
end of the report.
6-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

NODe Command
The Node command allows the operator to display or print the operating status of
any node in the system. (The NODe command is not supported for WAIOs.) The
basic display without any modifiers includes:
• Node number and custom message
• Software and configuration revision levels
• Number and type of active events
Use the /V modifier with the Node command to produce a list of all software and
configuration versions in all of the nodes.
Use the /D modifier to produce diagnostic reports of each node in the system.
These diagnostic reports include information on network activity and the percent-
age of total use.
Use the /L modifier with any form of the command to create a printed report on
the system printer.
Use the /R modifier to reset node diagnostics.

PASsword Command
To log off, or lock, the console, type PAS/L and press ENTER. The operator is
obligated to log off when leaving the console. After logging off, the operator must
log on again before performing any system operation.

RESet Command
The Reset command causes all or part of the MXL system to perform a full reset.
If the command is followed by a node number, then only that node is reset. If the
command is followed by the /A modifier, then all nodes are reset.
During a System reset, the NCCG sends a panel reset command to each node in
the system. As each node responds with verification of the reset, the NCCG
clears the event list of all paired events. [A paired event is defined as a cycle in
the monitoring process where two event list entries together have 1.) recorded a
device becoming active and being acknowledged, and then 2.) going inactive and
again being acknowledged.] The reset operation causes any unpaired active
event, such as an alarm, to generate a corresponding inactive event that
must be acknowledged by the operator.
The System does not allow the operator to reset any node having unacknowl-
edged events of any type.

6-8
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

SHOw Command
The Show command allows the operator to see various lists of active conditions
displayed in a window. A modifier used on the end of the command determines
which data is displayed;
SHO (with no modifiers) shows all active events in the system.
SHO/A shows active alarms only.
SHO/S shows active supervisories only.
SHO/B shows active security (burglary) alarms only.
SHO/T shows active troubles on the system only.
SHO/UA shows unacknowledged alarms.
SHO/UT shows unacknowledged troubles.
SHO/D shows disabled devices.
In addition to a modifier (such as, /A, /S, /T, /B, /U, or /D) the Show command
accepts a node number as an argument. In this form, the command displays only
the requested items from the specified node. For example:
SHO/UA 10 shows only unacknowledged alarms from node 10.

SILence Command
The Silence command silences (turns off) and unsilences (turns on) audible
devices in the system. In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus configuration, the silence
command is limited to the audible device (PC speaker) within the NCCG only.
Use the Silence command without modifiers to silence the audible devices in the
list of nodes that you specify.
Use the /U modifier to unsilence the devices.
Use the /T modifier to toggle the state of the audible devices. Toggling changes
the state of the audible device from sounding (unsilenced) to silent, or from silent
to sounding.
Use the /X modifier to act upon all the nodes in the system. This modifier can be
used with the other Silence command modifiers to produce the desired effect on
a system-wide basis.
Use the /M modifier to temporarily silence the NCC audible.
Note: The Silence command can only operate on a node if all pending alarm
conditions are acknowledged.
The following examples show various uses of the Silence command.
Type SIL 5 and press ENTER to unconditionally silence (not toggle) the
audibles in node 5 only.
Type SIL/U 5 8 and press ENTER to unsilence the audibles in nodes 5 and 8.

6-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Type SIL/X and press ENTER to silence all audibles in the system.
Type SIL/TX and press ENTER to toggle the audible state in the entire
system.
In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus configuration, none of the modifiers has any
effect. Regardless of the form of the Silence command that is used, only the
audible device located within the NCC is silenced. This does not apply to the
NCC-GL.

Fixed System Macro Commands


The following Fixed System Macro Commands are automatically installed and
cannot be edited or deleted:

FIXED MACRO COMMANDS


Password
Command L ev el Description
AAL A Acknowledge Alarm
ATR A Acknowledge Trouble
ASC A Acknowledge Security
ASP A Acknowledge Supervisory
CRS A Reset the System (all nodes)
H LP * Help
LAL A List Alarms
LAV A List Analog Voltage
LD T A List Device Types
LMS A List Messages
LMT A List Module Type
LOF A Log Off
LON * Log On
LS C A List Security
LS P A List Supervisory
LS S A List Sensitivity Settings
LS T A List Status
LS V A List Sensitivity Voltage
LTR A List Trouble
LTV A List Threshold Voltage
SUA A Silence/Un-Silence Audible

6-10
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

User Defined Macro Commands


User Defined Macros can be executed in one of three ways:
• Type the macro name in the Manual Command Entry Window, as
described on page 6-1, or on the Touch Screen (all user defined macros)
• Click on the corresponding Macro Number in the User Defined Com-
mands window as shown in Figure 6-2. (U1 through U40 macros only)
See Control and Event Customization - Macros on page 4-45 for informa-
tion about defining macros.
• Press the corresponding Alt+key combination, as described in the Func-
tion Key Assignments Table on page 6-13 (U1 through U10 only).

USER Button
To access the User Defined Commands window:

 From the main operator display, click on the USER button near the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ™ key.


The following window pops up:

Figure 6-2
User Defined Commands Window

The User Defined Commands window displays each of the macros that have
been named using the U+number (1 through 40 only) naming method.

6-11
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

To run macro U1 through U40:

 From the User Defined Commands window, click on the button


next to the macro that you want to run, or

To exit the User Defined Commands window:

 Click on the Done button, or


 Press the ¦ + d key.
Function Key Assignments
The Keys and Function Key Combinations have predefined macros attached to
them as described in the Function Key Assignments Table on the next page.

6-12
Chapter 6 Manual Operation

FUNCTION KEY ASSIGNMENTS

KEY COMMAND OPERATION


F1 HELP Context Sensi ti ve Help
ACK TOP Acknowledges the top event i n the event li st wi ndow. Thi s i s only the NCC
F2
EVENT Graphi cs console acknowledge i n the CAMPUS system.
Si lence System audi ble si lence toggle. Thi s i s only the local buzzer i n the CAMPUS
F3
Toggle system.
F4 F4 Zoom In one level
F5 F5 Zoom Out one level
F6 F6 Next event
F7 F7 Previ ous event
F8 F8 Show reports
F9 F9 User commands
F 10 — (Not appli cable)
F11 LON Log on
F 12 CRS Reset. Thi s i s only the NCC Graphi cs Console Reset i n a CAMPUS system.

Shift-F1 — (Not appli cable)

Shift-F2 S F2 User defi ned functi on named SF2


Shift-F3 S F3 User defi ned functi on named SF3
Shift-F4 — More commands
Shift-F5 LS C Li st Securi ty
Shift-F6 LTR Li st Trouble
Shift-F8 LS P Li st Supervi sory
Shift-F9 — (Not appli cable)
Shift-F10 — (Not appli cable)
Shift-F11 LOF Log Off
Shift-F12 — (Not appli cable)
+ Gray SIL/X Si lence (no toggle)
- Gray SIL/UX Unsi lence (to toggle)
Ent Gray ACT/T Acknowledge the top event
Alt-F1 Alternate language select
Alt-F2 Engli sh language select
Alt-1 U1 User defi ned functi on named U1
Alt-2 U2 User defi ned functi on named U2
Alt-3 U3 User defi ned functi on named U3
Alt-4 U4 User defi ned functi on named U4
Alt-5 U5 User defi ned functi on named U5
Alt-6 U6 User defi ned functi on named U6
Alt-7 U7 User defi ned functi on named U7
Alt-8 U8 User defi ned functi on named U8
Alt-9 U9 User defi ned functi on named U9
Alt-0 U10 User defi ned functi on named U10

6-13
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

6-14
Chapter 7 History and Reports

7 History and Reports


History - Creating A Report
The History feature enables the automatic recording of global system events in
chronological order. The events recorded are device activities, operator com-
mands, etc. To enable the NCCG to store, retrieve, and report long-term event
history, make sure the History Logging and Reporting checkbox is selected as
described in the Options Tab section on page 4-4.

To access the History feature:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” keys.


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the History button, or


 Press the ¦ + i keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 7-1
History Window

To generate a history report,

 Click on the Create Report button, or


 Press the ¦ + r keys.

7-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The following window pops up:

Figure 7-2
History: Setup Report Window - Files Tab

Set the parameters for the report.


NOTE: History reports are typically lengthy and tie up the printer for a
long time. Because alarm and trouble processing has priority over
history reports, any events occurring during the printing of a report
are interspersed in the report. History events are preceded by a
vertical bar in the printout; alarm and trouble events are not.
The Files tab of the History: Setup Report Window provides the following
selections:
• History Source - Select the source of history data from one of the
following two choices:
Local – The system’s history file maintained on the hard disk.
Floppy Archive Disk – A previously archived period of history main-
tained in a file on floppy diskette(s) for permanent off-line storage. If
you choose this option

 Click on the Load button, or  Press the ¦ + L keys.


Then choose the file to load from the History Archive Select window. Enter
the name of the history file from which you will create the report. (See
Retrieving an Archived History File on page 7-10 for more information.)

• History Report Destination - Choose screen, printer external or XML.


If you click on External, the program will save the history report to a plain
ASCII text file in a comma delimited format. The output contains three record
types—COMMAND, EVENT and INFO—in the order and format shown in
the External History Report File Format table on the next page. Note
that all text strings begin and end with quotes.
7-2
Chapter 7 History and Reports

EXT ERNAL HIST ORY REPORT FILE FORMAT


Fieldname Type Description
COMMAND (In this example: "Command",27,10,1998,15,31,33,0,0,"*CMD#",00002,"DEFAULT","D","ACKNOWLEDGE/OX")
"COMMAND" string Identifies this record type as a command
27 integer Day of month
10 integer Month
1998 integer Year
15 integer Hour
31 integer Minute
33 integer Second
0 integer Future use
0 integer Future use
"*CMD #" string Command type
00002 integer Command sequence number
"DEFAULT" string User name
"D" string Login level (*,A,B,C,D,E)
"ACKNOWLEDGE/OX " string Body of the command text

EVENT (In this example: "EVENT ",25,02,1999,15,35,00,"TRB","IN"," ",0,2,17,255,"Module Not Responding")

"EVENT " string Identifies this record type as an event (note that the trailing space is alw ays present)
25 integer Day of month
02 integer Month
1999 integer Year
15 integer Hour
35 integer Minute
00 integer Second
Event type : ALR - Alarm TRB - Trouble
"TRB" string SEC - Security STA - Status SUP -
Supervisory
Event direction : IN - An incoming event (except for status) ON - A status activation
"IN" string OUT - An outgoing event (except for status) OFF - A status
deactivation
Acknow ledgement type:
" "- Unacknow ledged (blank field)
" " string -LC - Acknow ledged from this NCC node
-RM - Acknow ledged from another node
-L? - Local acknow ledgement attempt w as not confirmed by remote node

0 integer Netw ork number of this device (alw ays zero in this version of softw are)
2 integer Node number of this device
17 integer Module number of this device
255 integer Device number of this device
Note: 0 is used to represent a node only message that has no device association
255 is used to represent a module only message that has no device association
1-254 are valid device numbers

"Module Not Responding" string Custom message for this device

INFO (In this example: "INFO ",08,12,1999,14,14,06,"NCC System Restarted")


Identifies this record type as an informational message (Note that the trailing spaces
"INFO " string
are alw ays present)
08 integer Day of month
12 integer Month
1999 integer Year
14 integer Hour
14 integer Minute
06 integer Second
"NCC System Restarted" string Informational message. Contents may vary.

7-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

If you click on XML, the program will save the history report to a plain ASCII text
file in an XML format. The output contains five tags - report, history, EVENT,
COMMAND and RESTART. The following table shows the definition of each tag
in the XML file.
EXT ERNAL HIST ORY REPORT FILE FORMAT- XML
Tagname Attributes Description
<report> Declare an NCC report in XML format
<history> Declare a history file report
<EVENT> Identifies this record type as an event
Date Date as mm-dd-yy
Time Time as hh-mm-ss
Type Event type: ALR - Alarm TRB - Trouble SEC - Security STA - Status SUP - Supervisory
Direction Event direction: IN or OUT
Acknow ledgement type:
" " - Unacknow ledged (blank field)
Ack Type -LC - Acknow ledged from this NCC node
-RM - Acknow ledged from another node
-L? - Local acknow ledgement attempt w as not confirmed by remote node
Net Netw ork number of this device (alw ays zero in this version of softw are)
Node Node number of this device
Module Module number for this device
Device Device number for this device
Component Component number for this device
SubModule Sub-Module number for this device
Event Text
<COMMAND> Identifies this record type as a command
Date Date as mm-dd-yy
Time Time as hh-mm-ss
Prefix Command type
Code Command sequence number
Name User Name
Level Login level (*,A,B,C,D,E)
Command Text
<RESTART> Identifies this record type as a system restart
Date Date as mm-dd-yy
Time Time as hh-mm-ss
Restart Text

History XML file sample


<?xml version=”1.0" ?>
- <report>
- <history>
<RESTART Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:23:56">History purged manually</RESTART>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:24:04" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=””
Net=”0" Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:24:06" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2430"
Name=”MASTER” Level=”E”>ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:24:06" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”-
LC” Net=”0" Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>

7-4
Chapter 7 History and Reports

<RESTART Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:24:59">NCC System Restarted</RESTART>


<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:24:59" Prefix=”!ERR @” Code=”2430" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:09" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2431" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>PASSWORD</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:09" Prefix=”!ERR @” Code=”2431" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>MASTER << Password Level NOT Authorized</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:17" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2432" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>PASSWORD</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:17" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2432" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>-Log off operator: ? Access level=*</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:17" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2432" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=E</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:25:24" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<RESTART Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:26:53">NCC System Restarted</RESTART>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:26:53" Prefix=”!ERR @” Code=”2432" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:27:00" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2433" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>PASSWORD</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:27:00" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2433" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>-Log off operator: ? Access level=*</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:27:00" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2433" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=E</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:27:18" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<RESTART Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:32">NCC System Restarted</RESTART>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:32" Prefix=”!ERR @” Code=”2433" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:41" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2434" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>PASSWORD</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:41" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2434" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>-Log off operator: ? Access level=*</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:41" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2434" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=E</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:35:57" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:36:05" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2435" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:36:05" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”-LC” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<RESTART Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:16">NCC System Restarted</RESTART>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:16" Prefix=”!ERR @” Code=”2435" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:22" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2436" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>PASSWORD</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:22" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2436" Name=”?”
Level=”*”>-Log off operator: ? Access level=*</COMMAND>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:22" Prefix=”+OPR @” Code=”2436" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=E</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:41:40" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
<COMMAND Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:42:37" Prefix=”*CMD #” Code=”2437" Name=”MASTER”
Level=”E”>ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND>
<EVENT Date=”07-20-06" Time=”18:42:38" Type=”TRB” Direction=”IN” AckType=”-LC” Net=”0"
Node=”14" Module=”1" Device=”6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT>
</history>
</report> 7-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Then click on the Start Report button to assign a filename and location for the file
in the following window:

Figure 7-3
History Destination Select Window

Click on the Date Range tab of the History: Setup Report Window. The follow-
ing window pops up:

Figure 7-4
History: Setup Report Window - Date Range Tab

• Report Starting Date and Time – The beginning date and time of the
selected file is the default starting date and time. Press the Set button to
change this selection. The starting date and time must always be less
than the ending date and time.
• Report Ending Date and Time – The ending date and time of the select-
ing file is the default ending date and time. Press the Set button to change
this selection. The ending date and time must always be greater than the
starting date and time.
• Defaults – Press this button to reset the start and end dates to the file
defaults.
• Set – Press this button to choose the start and/or end times and dates for
7-6 the report. (See Figure 7-5 - Start Date Selection Window)
Chapter 7 History and Reports

Figure 7-5
Start Date Selection Window

Click on the Devices tab of the History: Setup Report Window. The following
window pops up:

Figure 7-6
History: Setup Report Window - Devices Tab

Choose the device or range of devices to be included in this report.


• Select either Select by device or Device Range (See Figure 7-6)
• Enter the First Device address and press the select button.
• Enter the Last Device address (if Device Range was selected) and press
the select button.

7-7
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-7
Select Device Window

The Filters tab of the History: Setup Report Window provides the following
selections:
• Filter by Event Type – Select the type of events that you want to include
in the report. Or, select the All or None buttons to include all events or
none of the events.
• Filter by Operator Logon – Select one of the following two choices:
All Operators – Creates a report for all operators.
Select Operator - Creates a report using the information from one opera-
tor only. Enter the Logon for this operator in the Operator Logon box.

Figure 7-8
History: Setup Report Window - Filters Tab

Then, click on one of the following buttons:


• Start Report: Begins creating the report according to the currently
selected parameters.
• Done: Exit this window without creating a report.

7-8
Chapter 7 History and Reports

To abandon a history report once it has begun printing,

 Click on the Stop Report button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
History - Creating An Archive
The system’s current history file is maintained on the hard disk. When enough
history accumulates to fill at least 80 percent of a floppy diskette, the system
displays a message on the status line normally occupied by the SYSTEM
NORMAL message. That message reads 80% MAX HIST.
Your system (hard disk) probably accommodates a value of about 400%.
However, when the message first appears, we recommend that you transfer the
history to one or more floppy diskettes until the status message returns to
SYSTEM NORMAL.
The operator may, at any time, choose to archive the accumulated history of the
system. The recorded events are transferred to floppy diskette(s) or to a CD for
permanent off-line storage. To perform the archive operation:

From the History window,

 Click on the Archive History button, or


 Press the ¦ + c keys.
The following window pops up:

Figure 7-9
Archive History Window

7-9
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Insert a diskette into the A: drive or the CD drive. The selection of a floppy or CD
is set in the System Settings Window (refer to page 4-4).

 Click on the Start button, or  Press the ¦ + s keys to


archive the current history file to floppy diskettes or CD.
NOTE: If the diskette is blank and formatted, click on the Erase Only (no
format) check box. The archive procedure will begin immediately. If
the diskette is not formatted, the system will first format the diskette.
Archiving will begin when the diskette has been formatted.
• Once the last diskette is filled, there may be a long interval while the
current master history file is reorganized. At the end of the process, the
system displays a message showing the beginning and ending dates and
the lines of history archived onto the diskettes.
• Write this information on a label and place the label on the floppy diskette.
• Place a write-protect tab over the notch of the diskette and file the diskette
for possible future reference.
• Press ENTER when the backup sequence is completed and you have
finished labeling the diskette. You may halt the archiving process at any
time by pressing the STOP button. If you do so before the diskette is
filled, the current master history file on the hard disk remains as it was
before you began the process.
If you press the STOP button after the hard disk packing process begins,
the command is ignored. (In a packing process, old records are removed
and the remaining data is moved down into those areas, in sequence, to
conserve space.)

Retrieving an Archived History File


• Click on the Create A Report button from the Main History menu.
• Under the Files tab, select Floppy Archive disk for the History Source.
• Put the diskette containing the History file in the drive.
• Select the History Report Destination (Screen or Printer).
• Click on the Load button.
• A History Archive Select window will appear. Choose the appropriate
drive, directory, and file name and click on the OK button.
• This will bring you back to the History Setup Report window. Click on the
Start Report button.
• When you have finished with the report, click on the Done button.

To return to the MORE COMMANDS window,

 Click on the Done button, or


 Press the ¦ + d keys.
7-10
Chapter 8 Graphic Editor

8 Graphic Editor

Introduction
Using the NCCG Graphic Editor, you can create or edit the background images
assigned to each zoom level.
Note: The current version does not support editing a CAD drawing in any valid
format.

To access the graphic editor:

 From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the
bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or

 Press the ¨ + ” key


The More Commands window pops up.

 From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or


 Press the ¦ + S keys.
The Setup window pops up.

 From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or


 Press the ¦ + i keys.
The Images window pops up.

 Click on the Images tab, then


 Click on the Create button, or
 Press the ¦ + c keys.
The Graphic Editor window pops up, as shown on the next page. For additional
information, see the Creating and Editing Images section in Chapter 4.

8-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

OPEN SAVE PEN FILL PEN OUTLINE FILL OUTLINE FONT BACK- FORE-
FILE FILE COLOR COLOR WIDTH & FILL ONLY ONLY SELECT GROUND GROUND
COLOR COLOR
PALETTE PALETTE

DRAWING
TOOLS

DRAWING
AREA
Figure 8-1
Graphic Editor

Creating a New File

To create a new file,  Click on File in the pull down menu and select New
Image. The following window pops up:

Figure 8-2
New Image Parameters Window

Select the Width (number of pixels), Height (number of pixels) and Background
Color for this image and click OK. The window will close and return you to the
drawing area of the graphic editor window. If you click on the Default button
before clicking OK, the settings will return to the default values (width = 890,
height = 590, background color = white).
8-2
Chapter 8 Graphic Editor

Opening a File

To open a file,  Click on the button or select File and Background


Image from the pull down menu. The following window pops up:

Figure 8-3
Base Image Window

Select the file that you wish to open and click Enter. The image will then appear
in the drawing area of the graphic editor window.

Selecting Colors

To select a pen color,  Click on the button.


The following window pops up:

Figure 8-4
Set Pen Color Window

Select the pen color by sliding each of the bars for red, green and blue to the
right. The pen color previews in the box at the top of the window. Click on the
SET button to set the color for the current drawing and outline pen and exit the
window.

To select a fill color,  Click on the button.

8-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

The following window pops up:

Figure 8-5
Set Fill Color Window

Select the fill color by sliding each of the bars for red, green and blue to the right.
The fill color previews in the box at the top of the window. Click on the SET
button to set the color for the current fill and exit the window.

Setting Pen Width

To select pen width color,  Click on the button or select Options and
Pen Size from the pull down menu. The following window pops up:

Figure 8-6
Set Pen Width Window

Enter a number between 1 (narrow) and 10 (wide) and click on the SET button.
This changes the width of the drawing and outline pen and exits the window.
You can also select pen width by clicking the up and down arrows on the

section of the tool bar to choose a pen width number


between 1 (narrow) and 10 (wide).

Selecting Frame and/or Fill


Many of the drawing tools create shapes that have both frames (borders) and fill
areas, as shown in Figure 8-1. You can select the way in which these tools draw

8-4
Chapter 8 Graphic Editor

objects by clicking on one of the following three buttons:

Objects have frames and fill

Objects have frames only

Objects have fill only

or select Options and Fill from the pull down menu. Choose from Frame and
Fill, Frame Only, or Fill Only.

Selecting a Font
The Text Tool adds text to your drawing, as described in the Drawing Tools
section on page 8-6. To select a font for the Text Tool,

 Click on the button or select Options and Font from the pull
down menu. The following window pops up:

Figure 8-7
Set Edit Text Window

Select the font Name, Style, Size and Emphasis. Click on the OK button to set
the color for the text tool and exit the window. The current font name displays on
the tool bar in a window to the right of the Font Select Button as shown below:

8-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Drawing Tools
The drawing tools create and change objects as follows:

MOVE TOOL Moves an object

STYLE TOOL Applies the current styles (colors, pen width, etc.) to an object

ERASE TOOL Erases an object.

RECTANGLE TOOL Creates a rectangle

ELLIPSE TOOL Creates an ellipse

POLYGON TOOL Creates a polygon

PIE TOOL Creates a pie wedge

FREEHAND TOOL Creates a freehand bounded (closed) object

LINE TOOL Creates a freehand line

ARC TOOL Creates a curve

POLYLINE TOOL Creates a polyline (one to many joined line segments)

BITMAP INSERT Adds a bitmap image to the graphic

TEXT EDIT Adds text to the graphic

Saving a File

To save a file,  Click on the button. The following window pops up:

Figure 8-8
Save Window

Name the file that you wish to save, select a directory and click the SAVE button.
This saves the graphic file and closes the save window.

8-6
Appendix A

UL Listed Industrial Ordering Information

MODEL DESCRIPT ION PART NUMBER

UL 864 Listed 2.8 GHz, Pentium 4 Industrial Computer*


SCD-XP-B 500-650234
(to be used w ith SCD-17L-2 or SCD-19L-2)

UL 864 Listed 2.8 GHz, Pentium 4 Industrial Computer*


SCD-XPWAN-B 500-650236
(to be used w ith SCD-17L-2 or SCD-19L-2)

UL 864 Listed 2.8 GHz, Pentium 4 Industrial Computer*


SCD-XP-BT 500-650235
(to be used w ith SCD-17LT-2 or SCD-19LT-2)

UL 864 Listed 2.8 GHz, Pentium 4 Industrial Computer*


SCD-XPWAN-BT 500-650237
(to be used w ith SCD-17LT-2 or SCD-19LT-2)

SCD-17L-2 UL 864 Listed 17" LCD Monitor* 500-650240

SCD-17LT-2 UL 864 Listed 17" LCD Touch Monitor* 500-650241

SCD-19L-2 UL 864 Listed 19" LCD Monitor* 500-650238

SCD-19LT-2 UL 864 Listed 19" LCD Touch Monitor* 500-650239

PAL-1 UL 864 Listed Parallel Printer (Monochrome) 500-692407

*See descriptions under UL Listed Industrial Computer specifications on page 2-2.

NOT E: Rack Mount Equipment is also available.


Contact Siemens Fire Safety at 1-800-222-0108 for details.

A-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

A-2
Appendix B

Latitude and Longitude of Selected Cities

City Lat. N Long. W City Lat. N Long. W


° ' ° ' ° ' ° '
Albany, NY ................. 42 39 73 45 Memphis, TN .............. 35 09 90 03
Atlanta, GA ................. 33 45 84 24 Miami, FL ................... 25 17 80 11
Atlantic City, NJ .......... 39 22 74 26 Montreal, QUE ........... 45 30 73 33

Baltimore, MD ............ 39 17 76 37 Newark, NJ ................ 40 44 74 10


New York, NY ............ 40 45 73 59
Boston, MA ................ 42 21 71 03
Brownsville, TX .......... 25 54 97 30 Orlando, FL ................ 28 33 81 23
Buffalo, NY ................. 42 53 78 52 Ottawa, ONT .............. 45 26 75 42
Butte, MT .................... 46 01 112 32
Philadelphia, PA ......... 39 57 75 09
Charlotte, NC ............. 35 14 80 51 Phoenix, AZ ............... 33 27 112 04
Chicago, IL ................. 41 52 87 38 Pittsburgh, PA ............ 40 26 80 00
Cincinnati, OH ............ 39 06 84 31 Pocatello, ID ............... 42 52 112 27
Providence, RI ........... 41 50 71 25
Dallas, TX .................. 32 47 96 48
Quebec City, QUE ..... 46 49 71 12
Denver, CO ................ 39 45 104 59
Detroit, MI .................. 42 20 83 03 Reno, NV ................... 39 31 119 49
Durham, NC ............... 36 00 78 54 Richmond, VA ............ 37 32 77 26

Fairbanks, AK ............ 64 48 147 51 Sacramento, CA ......... 38 35 121 30


St. Louis, MO ............. 38 38 90 12
Gary, IN ...................... 41 36 87 20 Salt Lake City, UT ...... 40 45 111 53
San Diego, CA ........... 32 43 117 09
Hartford, CT ............... 41 46 72 41 San Francisco, CA ..... 37 47 122 25
Honolulu, HI ............... 21 18 157 52 Seattle, WA ................ 47 37 122 20
Houston, TX ............... 29 45 95 22
Tampa, FL .................. 27 57 82 27
Kansas City, MO ........ 39 05 94 35 Toronto, ONT ............. 43 39 79 23
Key West, FL ............. 24 33 81 48
Washington, DC ......... 38 54 77 01
Knoxville, TN .............. 35 58 83 55
Wichita, KS ................ 37 41 97 20
Wilmington, NC .......... 34 14 77 57
Las Vegas, NV ........... 36 10 115 09
Los Angeles, CA ........ 34 03 118 14
Sydney, Australia ....... 33 52S 151 12E

B-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

B-2
Appendix C

M ANUAL: CO RE SYST EM CO M M ANDS

Password
Command Level M odif ier Descript ion
ACKnowledge A Acknowledge a syst em event
/ 1¹ Acknowledge t he t op event in t he list
/ A¹ Acknowledge an alarm
/ S¹ Acknowledge a supervisory
/ B¹ Acknowledge a securit y event ( Burglary)
/T ¹ Acknowledge a t rouble
/X Block acknowledge modif ier f or Local - Highrise
DEEnergize² B De- energize ( t urn of f ) an out put device
DEVice B /S Set t he sensit ivit y of a device
DISable² B Disarm an input device
/O Disarm an out put device
/N Disconnect a node
ENAble² B Enable an input device
/O Enable an out put device
/N Connect a node
ENErgize² B Energize ( t urn on) an out put device
LISt A List all current events on t he syst em print er
/A List all current alarms on t he syst em print er
/S List all current supervisories on t he syst em print er
/B List all current securit y events on t he syst em
print er
/T List all current t rouble events on t he syst em print er
/U List unacknowledged only. Can be used in
combinat ion wit h A, S, B, and T above.
/D List all disabled, disconnect ed, or disarmed devices
D /N List user names ( If opt ion is select ed)
¹ In highrise configurations, an X needs to follow the modifier. In proprietary configurations, no X is
required, as show n.
² Command is not applicable to NFPA 72 Local - Campus.

C-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

MANUAL: CORE SYST EM COMMANDS

Password
Command Level Modifier Description
LOG A Log a user-entered message on the system printer
MODule A Display or print information on any module
/L Print on the system printer. Can be used in
combination with any of the following modifiers.
/S Sensitivity report (Volts)
/N CSG sensitivity report (Low, normal, high, etc.)
/T T hreshold report
/A Analog voltage report
/M Device message report
/C Device type report
NODe B Display or print current node status information
/L Print on the system printer. Can be used in
combination with the following modifiers.
/D Create diagnostic reports for all nodes
/R Reset diagnostic reports for all nodes
/C Module type report
/V Software version report for all nodes
PASsword * Enter an operator password
/L Log off (lock) the operator console
RESet² C Reset a remote node
/A Reset all nodes
/S Reset all nodes and the NCCNT-G
² Command is not applicable to NFPA 72 Local - Campus.

C-2
M ANUAL: CO RE SYST EM CO M M ANDS

Password
Command Level M odif ier Descript ion
SHO w * Show all or select ed act ive events in a scrolling
window

/A Show only alarms

/S Show only supervisories

/B Show only securit y events

/T Show only t rouble events

/U Unacknowledged. Can be used in combinat ion wit h


/ A, / S, / B, and / T above.

/D Show disabled, disarmed, and disconnect ed


devices
SILence A Silence the audible device(s) and/or local NCCNT-G
signal
/U Unsilence t he audible device( s)

/T Toggle t he stat e of t he audible device( s)

/X Act on all nodes

/M M ut e t he audibles f or 70 seconds t hen re- sound

C-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

C-4
Appendix D

OS/2 to NT Conversion

Before you proceed with an OS/2 to NT conversion, save the NCC database and
all NCC images from the OS/2 computer.

To determine which NCC version is installed in your system:


From the main operator window, click MORE > SETUP > SYSTEM. The version
number will display in the Serial section of the Title tab.

If you are using NCC version 2.23.021 or higher:


1. Use the SAVE feature in the OS/2 version of NCC (MORE > SETUP > SAVE)
to make copies of all images, icons and banners and their linkages onto
floppy disks. (See Chapter 4, pages 4-75 - 4-79.)
2. Install NCCNT following the instructions in Chapter 2, pages 2-38 - 2-52. If
you are going to install Windows NTTM and NCCNT on the OS/2 machine,
thereby erasing all data on the hard disk, make two sets of floppies as a
precaution. However, we recommend using two separate hard drives.
3. After installing NCCNT, use the LOAD feature (MORE > SETUP > LOAD) to
restore the saved images. Note: You must select "Migrate all files to current
default directories" for the automatic translation of drive letters from the OS/2
computer to the NT computer to occur. (All images will be placed together in
the \IMAGES folder on the same drive where Windows NT is installed.)
Failure to do so will result in lost images and icons. If you forget, you can
repeat the operation again.

If you are using an NCC version less than 2.23.021:


OPTION 1—Upgrading the OS/2 version of NCC to 2.23.021 using the CD-ROM
1. Exit NCC (Alt + F4).
2. Open a command line window.
3. Copy all files from the SBT, Inc. supplied CD-ROM \OS2\NCC2 to the NCC2
directory on your hard disk.
4. Restart the NCC.
5. From the main window, click MORE > SETUP > IMAGES. Select the Images
tab on the notebook. Click rebuild.
6. Perform the steps listed in "If you are using NCC version 2.23.021 or higher."

D-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

OPTION 2—Upgrading the OS/2 version of NCC to 2.23.021 if you do not have a
CD-ROM drive on the NCC computer
1. Put the SBT, Inc. supplied CD-ROM in any windows computer with a
CD-ROM drive.
2. Locate the directory \OS2\IMAGES.
3. Check the read.me file for instructions on creating floppy disks.
4. Install OS/2 NCC version 2.23.021 from the newly-created disks.
5. Restart the NCC.
6. From the main window, click MORE > SETUP > IMAGES. Select the Images
tab on the notebook. Click rebuild.
7. Perform the steps listed in "If you are using NCC version 2.23.021 or higher."

OPTION 3—Saving graphics files without upgrading the NCC to 2.23.021


1. Use the SAVE feature in the OS/2 version of NCC (MORE > SETUP >
SAVE) to save the NCC database.
2. Then, save all graphics files in the following manner:
a. Exit out of NCC to the OS/2 operating system.
b. Manually ZIP (compress using the PKZIP or other appropriate utility) all
files from the Images, Icons and Banners directories and copy onto
floppy disks.
3. Install NCCNT following the instructions in Chapter 2, pages 2-38 - 2-52.
4. After installing NCCNT, copy the zipped files onto the NT computer, unzip
(uncompress) and copy these files into the directories of the corresponding
name - Images, Icons and Banners. Note: Regardless of the source drive
(usually the D: drive) on the OS/2 machine, unzip the images and icons on
the NT machine into the subdirectory where NCCNT is installed (usually the
C: drive).
3. Use the LOAD feature (MORE > SETUP > LOAD) to restore the saved NCC
database. Note: You must select "Migrate all files to current default
directories" for the automatic proper translation of drive letters from the OS/2
computer to the NT computer to occur. (All images will be placed together in
the \IMAGES folder on the same drive where Windows NT is installed.)

NOTE: All non-UL listed Industrial Computers that have OS/2 installed on
the C: drive that is the only drive in the system must (after saving
all NCC images) first reformat that drive, then install Windows NT,
then install NCCNT. If you are using Model CP7585-P133,
performance cannot be guaranteed because it does not meet
Windows NT minimum requirements.

D-2
Appendix E

Event Reporting
Special Cases - Pseudo Modules

Special Case #1
Pseudo module 2 reports configuration errors on the primary XNET (MXL net-
work). The device numbers associated with module 2 represent the XNET node
that is in conflict with the NCC.
NN:MMM-DDD identifies the source of the event uniquely as node NN, module
MMM and then the device number, DDD (if applicable).
Example 1:
02:100-3 Displays if MXL node number 2 has a NIM-1R addressed as 100
indicating that node number 3 is in trouble.
However, when the NCCG is the node, the module is always
shown as 002:
05:002-3 Displays if the NCCG at Node 5 is annunciating that Node 3 is in
trouble.
Example 2:
02:100-0 Displays device number 0 if there is a custom message for the
module.
Example 3:
02:0-0 Displays module number 0 and device number 0 if there is a
custom message for the node.

Special Case #2
Pseudo module 5 reports CSG-M configurations out of date errors on the XNET.
The device numbers associated with module 5 represent the XNET node that
has a configuration that is now newer than the one in the NCC. This trouble is
only displayed if automatic downloading of the configuration is not enabled or
allowed.

E-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

Special Case #3
The NCC uses pseudo modules and pseudo devices to generate events about
conditions internal to the NCC. Pseudo module 1 reports NCC system wide
trouble events. The following table describes the meaning of the individual
pseudo devices on module 1.

NCC M odule 1 Pseudo Devices

Address Funct ion

1 NCC local hard disk read / write failure

2 NCC logging printer problem. (off-line, paper out)

NCC network failure. This is used to indicate a total loss of


4
network connectivity on the primary interface to the X/M net.

5 NCC software key violation.

E-2
Appendix F

Command Script Definition Guidelines


The names of the core command set were chosen so that the first three letters of
each name would be unique. You must type in enough characters to identify this
unique name (i.e., EN is not enough since it matches both ENERGIZE and
ENABLE).
When you write a command script, it becomes part of the command set. There-
fore, you must use enough letters so that core commands as well as any script
names are uniquely identified.
For example, if you create the command script DISARM-A, you cannot use the
abbreviation DIS for DISABLE since it now matches two commands - DISABLE
and DISARM-A. You must at least use the 5-letter abbreviation of DISAB as
shown below:
DISAB 1:1-33>40; DISAB 1:2-11>12; DISAB 1:2-14>16; DISAB 1:2-33>37;
DISAB 1:2-43>47; DISAB1:2-50>52; DISAB 1:3-1>7; DISAB 1:3-9>11;
DISAB 1:3-16>22; DISAB 1:3-27>28; DISAB 1:1-46; DISAB 1:2-19;
DISAB 1:2-26; DISAB 1:2-31; DISAB 1:2-41; DISAB1:1-21; DISAB 1:1-42;
DISAB 1:1-7; DISAB 1:1-18; DISAB 1:3-51
Also, a more efficient way to construct the above script is shown below. You can
group up to 8 or 9 arguments per line. This will minimize network traffic and allow
for faster execution.
DISAB 1:1-33>40 1:2-11>12 1:2-14>16 1:2-33>37
DISAB 1:2-43>47, etc.

F-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

SYNTAX FOR ADDRESS RANGE


nnn:mmm-ddd>eee

Where nnn = node number

mmm = module number

ddd = from device number

eee = to device number

nnn:mmm.sss-ddd>eee

Where nnn = node number

mmm = module number

sss = submodule number

ddd = from device number

eee = to device number

nnn:mmm-ddd>eee^cc

Where nnn = node number

mmm = module number

ddd = from device number

eee = to device number

cc = one of the following:

SM = P2 Photo component

TH = P2 Thermal component

NE = P2 Neural component

R1 = P2 Relay 1 component

R2 = P2 Relay 2 component

LD = LED component

S1 = Switch 1 component

S2 = Switch 2 component

SL = Status LED component

CV = Conventional zone component

F-2
Appendix G

Supported Vector File Formats


When CAD drawings are used as images in the NCC, the following summary of
supported vector file formats applies. This information was supplied by LEADTOOLS.

DWF Format (DWF)


DWF is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD for storing DWG files on
the World Wide Web. DWF is a 2D, vector-based description of drawings and
illustrations.
LEAD can load the following objects: Background (“Background”), Layer
(“Layer”), Polyline (“P”), Polygon (“P”), Polytriangle (“T”), Filled Ellipse (“E”),
Outline Ellipse (“E”), and Text (“X”).
LEAD can save the following objects: Background (“Background”), Layer
(“Layer”), Polyline (“P”), Polygon (“P”), Polytriangle (“T”), Filled Ellipse (“E”), and
Outline Ellipse (“E”).
This file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkits. Read and write
support for this format is provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkits and is
unlocked when the Vector features are unlocked. Read support for this file
format may be added to non-vector toolkits by purchasing a file format plug-in.
For more information on available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD.
The file constants associated with this file format are:
FILE_DWF
Required DLL: LFDWF14N.DLL. This format also requires LVKRN14N.DLL.
For DWF files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.
For DWF files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 8.

DWG Format (DWG)


DWG is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD. It can contain 2D or 3D
objects and offers compression and a CRC check for internal data.
LEADTOOLS supports DWG 13, 14 and 15 files and can load the following
objects: LAYER, BLOCK, TEXT, MTEXT, VERTEX 2D, VERTEX 3D, VERTEX
MESH, VERTEX PFACE, VERTEX PFACE FACE, POLYLINE 2D, POLYLINE
3D, POLYLINE PFACE, POLYLINE MESH, INSERT, MINSERT, ARC, CIRCLE,
LINE, POINT, 3DFACE, SOLID, TRACE, ELLIPSE, LWPOLYLINE, SPLINE,

G-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

LEADER, DIMENSION ORDINATE, DIMENSION LINEAR, DIMENSION


ALIGNED, DIMENSION ANG 3PT, DIMENSION ANG 2LN, DIMENSION RA-
DIUS, DIMENSION DIAMETER, ATTRIB, ATTDEF, REGION, 3DSOLID, BODY.
LEADTOOLS currently does not load the following objects:
ACAD_PROXY_ENTITY, HATCH, MLINE, OLEFRAME, OLE2FRAME, RAY,
SHAPE, VIEWPORT, and XLINE.
This file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkits. Read support for this
format is provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkits and is unlocked when the
Vector features are unlocked. Read support for this file format may be added to
non-vector toolkits by purchasing a file format plug-in. For more information on
available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD.
The default extension used by this format is: DWG.
LEAD supports the object types listed above, as well as, layers and the grouping
of objects. Embedded raster objects are not supported.
File constants associated with this file format are:
FILE_DWG
Required DLL: LFDWG14N.DLL. This format also requires LVKRN14N.DLL.
For DWG files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.

Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)


DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) was first introduced by AutoDesk AutoCAD,
and is one of the most widely used CAD/CAM/CAE applications in the world.
DXF is very popular and is supported by most 3D formats on PC platforms.
A DXF file is an ASCII file containing 2D and 3D components representing a
drawing. Those components are known as Entities. The DXF file can represent
almost any CAD drawing using those entities, and can connect a group of enti-
ties together (such as windows, doors, etc.) and use them later in the file. The
DXF file has seen many changes through the years, from version 2.6 to the
latest release version 14. However, the latest release of AutoCAD still manages
to open files created with any of the earlier versions.
LEADTOOLS supports all current variations of the DXF format (versions 2.6, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13, 14) and loads the following objects: LAYER, BLOCK, LINE,
3DFACE, TRACE, SOLID, ARC, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, POINT, LWPOLYLINE,
POLYLINE, SPLINE, INSERT, TEXT, MTEXT, DIMENSION, LEADER, TOLER-
ANCE, ATTRIB, ATTDEF, 3DSOLID, VERTEX, and IMAGE.
LEADTOOLS can save the following objects: POINT, LINE, SOLID, 3DFACE,
POLYLINE, VERTEX, ELLIPSE, CIRCLE, ARC, TEXT, BLOCK, INSERT, and
IMAGE.

G-2
LEADTOOLS currently does not support the following objects:
ACAD_PROXY_ENTITY, BODY, HATCH, MLINE, OLEFRAME, OLE2FRAME,
RAY, REGION, SHAPE, VIEWPORT, and XLINE. You can load any of the DXF
files as either vector images or raster images. Users can load a DXF file, and
save it to any of file formats supported by LEADTOOLS.
This file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkits. Read support and
write support for this format are provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkits and
are unlocked when the Vector features are unlocked. Read support for this file
format may be added to non-vector toolkits by purchasing a file format plug-in.
For more information on available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD.
LEADTOOLS also supports the ability to save a vector image as a DXF within a
TIFF.
The file constants associated with this file format are:
FILE_DXF
FILE_DXF_R12 (R12 DXF)
FILE_DXF_R13 (R13 DXF)
FILE_TIF_DXF
Required DLL: LFDXF14N.DLL. This format also requires LVKRN14N.DLL.
For DXF files, you can read and write (Vector toolkits only) the following bits per
pixel: 8.

G-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

G-4
Appendix H

NCC-2F Driver Installation


The NCC-2F is a PCI-compliant network card used with the NCC and NCC WAN
systems. The NCC-2F allows the user to interface MXL and XLS systems over
XNET and to connect to WAN components using HNET. The NCC-2F provides
the NCC with an RS-485 supervised network.
The module fits in any available PCI 5V-compliant slot. The card is keyed so that
it will only fit in the appropriate PCI slot.The module comes preinstalled in the
NCC. When a PC with an NCC-2F card is first started, the card will be detected
in Windows, and the user will be prompted to install the drivers. The drivers are
on the Firefinder NT (P/N 316-099108) and the Firefinder NCC NT WAN (P/N
316-048853) installation disks. Load the disk (both disks have the same drivers)
in the CD-ROM drive, and follow the following instructions for installing the
drivers. Each card will automatically prompt the user for drivers. There are three
drivers to install: one for the PCI card UART, and two for the PCI communication
ports. You will repeat the outlined installation steps a total of three times.
After the first card is installed, the next card will prompt the user for its drivers.
Just repeat the following steps for the second card. When all is complete, refer to
the Device Manger to check the COM port designations, and view any installa-
tion issues. The following steps take you through the process.
1. When the NCC-2F is first installed, Windows will detect the new hardware.
At this point select the “No, not at this time” option and click on Next>.

H-1
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

2. Select “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and then click
Next>.

3. Select Next> and search for the CD-ROM drive where the
OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder is located. On the Firefinder NCC Install
CD this location is:
D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers

If the CD-ROM drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC.

4. After you highlight the folder, click “OK” to proceed. Now that the path is
set, click Next>. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. When you
see the following Hardware Installation warning, click “Continue Anyway.”

H-2
5. The Windows XP Hardware Wizard will install the drivers as shown in the
following figure.

6. If the drivers were successfully installed the following message will be


displayed:

H-3
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

7. Click “Finish.” Windows will prompt the user to install the drivers for the
serial port.
Note: Windows will use the first available COM port for communication.

8. Select "Next>" and search for the CD-ROM drive where the
OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder is located. On the Firefinder NCC Install
CD this location is:
D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers
If CD-ROM drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC.

9. After you highlight the folder, click “OK” to proceed. Now that the path is
set, click Next>. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. When you
see the following Hardware Installation warning, click “Continue Anyway.”

H-4
10. If the drivers were successfully installed, the following message will be
displayed:

11. Click “Finish.” Windows will prompt the user to install the drivers for the
additional PCI Communications Port.

H-5
NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

12. Select Next> and search for the CD-ROM drive where the
OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder is located. On the Firefinder NCC
Install CD this location is:
D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers
If CD-ROM drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC.
13. After you highlight the folder, click “OK” to proceed. Now that the path is
set, click Next>. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. When you
see the following Hardware Installation warning, click “Continue Anyway.”

14. If the drivers were successfully installed the following message will be
displayed:
15. To verify which COM ports were installed and to check that there are no
issues, right-click “My Computer” on the Desktop, and select “Properties."
Click the “Hardware” tab.

16. Click on “Device Manager.”


NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual

17. Click the “+” sign next to Ports (COM & LPT).

18. The example below displays two NCC-2F cards installed. They are
configured in pairs, i.e., COM 3 and COM 4 are the first NCC-2F and
COM 5 and COM 6 are the second NCC-2F. The NCC will use COM
three for the first card and COM 5 for the second card.
WARNING:
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio
communications. It has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15
of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference in which case
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd.
8 Fernwood Road 2185 Derry Road West
Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Mississauga, Ontario L5N 7A6

P/N 315-049679-7

You might also like